Skip to main content
Jump to: navigation, search

Difference between revisions of "Configuring a Descriptor (ELUG)"

m (Configuring Fetch Groups)
m (How to Configure Query Keys Using Java)
 
(11 intermediate revisions by 6 users not shown)
Line 2: Line 2:
 
[[Special:Whatlinkshere/Configuring a Descriptor (ELUG)|Related Topics]]</div>This section describes how to configure EclipseLink project options common to two or more project types.
 
[[Special:Whatlinkshere/Configuring a Descriptor (ELUG)|Related Topics]]</div>This section describes how to configure EclipseLink project options common to two or more project types.
  
[[#Table 115-1|Configuring EclipseLink Descriptor]] lists the types of EclipseLink descriptors that you can configure and provides a cross-reference to the type-specific chapter that lists the configurable options supported by that type.
+
The following table lists the types of EclipseLink descriptors that you can configure and provides a cross-reference to the type-specific chapter that lists the configurable options supported by that type.
  
  
 
<span id="Table 115-1"></span>
 
<span id="Table 115-1"></span>
''''' Configuring EclipseLink Descriptor'''''
 
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Configuring EclipseLink Descriptor" summary="This table provides a cross-reference to additional descriptor configuration options." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Configuring EclipseLink Descriptor" summary="This table provides a cross-reference to additional descriptor configuration options." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
Line 35: Line 34:
 
<br>
 
<br>
  
[[#Table 115-2|Common Descriptor Options]] lists the configurable options shared by two or more EclipseLink descriptor types.
+
The [[#Table 115-2|Common Descriptor Options]] table lists the configurable options shared by two or more EclipseLink descriptor types.
 
+
For more information, see the following:
+
  
 +
For more information, see:
 
* [[Creating%20a%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)|Introduction to Descriptor Creation]]
 
* [[Creating%20a%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)|Introduction to Descriptor Creation]]
 
* [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)|Introduction to Descriptors]]
 
* [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)|Introduction to Descriptors]]
Line 45: Line 43:
  
 
==Configuring Common Descriptor Options==
 
==Configuring Common Descriptor Options==
This table lists the configurable options shared by two or more EclipseLink descriptor types. In addition to the configurable options described here, you must also configure the options described for the specific [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)|Descriptor Types]], as shown in [[#Table 115-1|Configuring EclipseLink Descriptor]].
+
This table lists the configurable options shared by two or more EclipseLink descriptor types. In addition to the configurable options described here, you must also configure the options described for the specific [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)#Descriptor Types|Descriptor Types]], as shown in the [[#Table 115-1|Configuring EclipseLink Descriptor]] table.
  
  
 
<span id="Table 115-2"></span>
 
<span id="Table 115-2"></span>
''''' Common Descriptor Options'''''
 
 
 
{| class="RuleFormalMax" dir="ltr" title="Common Descriptor Options" summary="This table lists the configurable options common to descriptors" width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
{| class="RuleFormalMax" dir="ltr" title="Common Descriptor Options" summary="This table lists the configurable options common to descriptors" width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
Line 302: Line 298:
 
A '''primary key''' is a unique identifier (made up of one or more persistent attributes) that distinguishes one instance of a class from all other instances of the same type. You use primary keys to define relationships and to define queries.
 
A '''primary key''' is a unique identifier (made up of one or more persistent attributes) that distinguishes one instance of a class from all other instances of the same type. You use primary keys to define relationships and to define queries.
  
For the descriptors shown in [[#Table 115-3|Descriptor Support for Primary Keys]], you must configure a primary key and you must ensure that your class contains one or more persistent fields suitable for this purpose.
+
For the descriptors shown in the [[#Table 115-3|Descriptor Support for Primary Keys]] table, you must configure a primary key and you must ensure that your class contains one or more persistent fields suitable for this purpose.
  
 
This table summarizes which descriptors support primary keys.
 
This table summarizes which descriptors support primary keys.
Line 308: Line 304:
  
 
<span id="Table 115-3"></span>
 
<span id="Table 115-3"></span>
''''' Descriptor Support for Primary Keys'''''
 
  
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Primary Keys" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support primary keys." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Primary Keys" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support primary keys." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
Line 317: Line 312:
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r2c1-t4" headers="r1c1-t4" align="left" |
 
| id="r2c1-t4" headers="r1c1-t4" align="left" |
Relational Descriptors  <sup>Foot 1 </sup>
+
Relational Descriptors  <sup> 1 </sup>
 
| headers="r2c1-t4 r1c2-t4" align="left" |
 
| headers="r2c1-t4 r1c2-t4" align="left" |
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
Line 331: Line 326:
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r4c1-t4" headers="r1c1-t4" align="left" |
 
| id="r4c1-t4" headers="r1c1-t4" align="left" |
EIS Descriptors  <sup>Foot 2 </sup>
+
EIS Descriptors  <sup> 2 </sup>
 
| headers="r4c1-t4 r1c2-t4" align="left" |
 
| headers="r4c1-t4 r1c2-t4" align="left" |
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
Line 345: Line 340:
 
|}
 
|}
  
<br><sup>Footnote 1 </sup>Relational class descriptors only (see [[Creating%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)|Creating Relational Class Descriptors]]).<br><sup>Footnote 2 </sup>EIS root descriptors only (see [[Creating%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)|EIS Root Descriptors]]).<br>
+
<br><sup> 1 </sup>[[Creating%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#Creating Relational Class Descriptors|Relational class descriptors]] only.<br><sup> 2 </sup> [[Creating%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#EIS Root Descriptors|EIS root descriptors]] only.<br>
  
For a relational class (non-aggregate) descriptor, choose any unique database field or set of unique database fields from the descriptor's associated table (see [[Configuring%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)|Configuring Associated Tables]]).
+
For a relational class (non-aggregate) descriptor, choose any unique database field or set of unique database fields from the descriptor's [[Configuring%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#Configuring Associated Tables|associated table]].
  
For an EIS root descriptor (see [[Configuring%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)|Configuring an EIS Descriptor as a Root or Composite Type]]), choose any unique attribute or text node or set of unique attributes or text nodes from the descriptor's schema context (see [[Configuring%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)|Configuring Schema Context for an EIS Descriptor]]).
+
For an [[Configuring%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#Configuring an EIS Descriptor as a Root or Composite Type|EIS root descriptor]], choose any unique attribute or text node or set of unique attributes or text nodes from [[Configuring%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#Configuring Schema Context for an EIS Descriptor|the descriptor's schema context]].
  
  
Line 371: Line 366:
 
| headers="r2c1-t5 r1c2-t5" align="left" |
 
| headers="r2c1-t5 r1c2-t5" align="left" |
 
To specify the primary keys for the table, click '''Add''' in order to do the following:
 
To specify the primary keys for the table, click '''Add''' in order to do the following:
* For a relational class descriptor, select a database field from the descriptor's associated table (see [[Configuring%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#Configuring Associated Tables|Configuring Associated Tables]]).
+
* For a relational class descriptor, select a database field from the descriptor's [[Configuring%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#Configuring Associated Tables|associated table]].
* For an EIS root descriptor, select an attribute or text node from the descriptor's schema context (see [[Configuring%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#Configuring Schema Context for an EIS Descriptor|Configuring Schema Context for an EIS Descriptor]]). For more information on choosing an element or attribute, see [[Configuring%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#Choosing a Schema Context|Choosing a Schema Context]].To remove a primary key, select the key and click '''Remove'''.
+
* For an EIS root descriptor, select an attribute or text node from the descriptor's [[Configuring%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#Configuring Schema Context for an EIS Descriptor|schema context]]. For more information on choosing an element or attribute, see [[Configuring%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#Choosing a Schema Context|Choosing a Schema Context]].
 +
 
 +
To remove a primary key, select the key and click '''Remove'''.
 
|}
 
|}
  
Line 406: Line 403:
  
 
<span id="Table 115-4"></span>
 
<span id="Table 115-4"></span>
''''' Descriptor Support for Read Only'''''
 
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Read Only" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support for read only." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Read Only" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support for read only." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
Line 414: Line 410:
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r2c1-t6" headers="r1c1-t6" align="left" |
 
| id="r2c1-t6" headers="r1c1-t6" align="left" |
Relational Descriptors <sup>Foot 1 </sup>
+
Relational Descriptors <sup> 1 </sup>
 
| headers="r2c1-t6 r1c2-t6" align="left" |
 
| headers="r2c1-t6 r1c2-t6" align="left" |
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
Line 428: Line 424:
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r4c1-t6" headers="r1c1-t6" align="left" |
 
| id="r4c1-t6" headers="r1c1-t6" align="left" |
EIS Descriptor <sup>Foot 2 </sup>
+
EIS Descriptor <sup> 2 </sup>
 
| headers="r4c1-t6 r1c2-t6" align="left" |
 
| headers="r4c1-t6 r1c2-t6" align="left" |
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
Line 442: Line 438:
 
|}
 
|}
  
<br><sup>Footnote 1 </sup>Relational class descriptors only (see [[Creating%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)|Creating Relational Class Descriptors]]).<br><sup>Footnote 2 </sup>EIS root descriptors only (see [[Creating%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)|EIS Root Descriptors]])<br><br>
+
<br><sup> 1 </sup>[[Creating%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#Creating Relational Class Descriptors|Relational class descriptors]] only.<br><sup> 2 </sup>[[Creating%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#EIS Root Descriptors|EIS root descriptors]] only.<br><br>
  
 
{| class="Note oac_no_warn" width="80%" border="1" frame="hsides" rules="groups" cellpadding="3" frame="hsides" rules="groups"
 
{| class="Note oac_no_warn" width="80%" border="1" frame="hsides" rules="groups" cellpadding="3" frame="hsides" rules="groups"
Line 449: Line 445:
 
|}
 
|}
  
<br>
+
 
  
  
 
===How to Configure Read-Only Descriptors Using Workbench===
 
===How to Configure Read-Only Descriptors Using Workbench===
 
 
To configure a descriptor as read-only use this procedure:
 
To configure a descriptor as read-only use this procedure:
 
 
# Select a descriptor in the '''Navigator'''. Its properties appear in the Editor.
 
# Select a descriptor in the '''Navigator'''. Its properties appear in the Editor.
 
# Click the '''Descriptor Info''' tab. The Descriptor Info tab appears.<br><span id="Figure 115-2"></span>''''' Descriptor Info Tab, Read Only Option'''''<br>[[Image:desread.gif|Descriptor Info Tab, Read Only Option]]<br><br>
 
# Click the '''Descriptor Info''' tab. The Descriptor Info tab appears.<br><span id="Figure 115-2"></span>''''' Descriptor Info Tab, Read Only Option'''''<br>[[Image:desread.gif|Descriptor Info Tab, Read Only Option]]<br><br>
Line 475: Line 469:
  
 
This table summarizes which descriptors support descriptor level unit of work conforming.
 
This table summarizes which descriptors support descriptor level unit of work conforming.
 
  
 
<span id="Table 115-5"></span>
 
<span id="Table 115-5"></span>
''''' Descriptor Support for Unit of Work Conforming'''''
 
 
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Unit of Work Conforming" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support unit of work conforming." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Unit of Work Conforming" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support unit of work conforming." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
Line 487: Line 478:
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r2c1-t8" headers="r1c1-t8" align="left" |
 
| id="r2c1-t8" headers="r1c1-t8" align="left" |
Relational Descriptors <sup>Foot 1 </sup>
+
Relational Descriptors <sup> 1 </sup>
 
| headers="r2c1-t8 r1c2-t8" align="left" |
 
| headers="r2c1-t8 r1c2-t8" align="left" |
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
Line 501: Line 492:
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r4c1-t8" headers="r1c1-t8" align="left" |
 
| id="r4c1-t8" headers="r1c1-t8" align="left" |
EIS Descriptors <sup>Foot 2 </sup>
+
EIS Descriptors <sup> 2 </sup>
 
| headers="r4c1-t8 r1c2-t8" align="left" |
 
| headers="r4c1-t8 r1c2-t8" align="left" |
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
Line 515: Line 506:
 
|}
 
|}
  
<br><sup>Footnote 1 </sup>Relational class descriptors only (see [[Creating%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)|Creating Relational Class Descriptors]]).<br><sup>Footnote 2 </sup>EIS root descriptors only (see [[Creating%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)|EIS Root Descriptors]])<br>
+
<br><sup> 1 </sup>[[Creating%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#Creating Relational Class Descriptors|Relational Class Descriptors]] only.<br><sup> 2 </sup>[[Creating%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#EIS Root Descriptors|EIS Root Descriptors]] only.<br>
  
 
When you configure a descriptor to conform results in a unit of work, when you execute a query in the unit of work, EclipseLink filters the data source result set to the changes currently made in the unit of work. EclipseLink adds new or changed objects that correspond to the query's selection criteria and removes changed objects that no longer correspond to the query's selection criteria.
 
When you configure a descriptor to conform results in a unit of work, when you execute a query in the unit of work, EclipseLink filters the data source result set to the changes currently made in the unit of work. EclipseLink adds new or changed objects that correspond to the query's selection criteria and removes changed objects that no longer correspond to the query's selection criteria.
Line 528: Line 519:
 
<br>
 
<br>
  
Conforming can reduce performance. Before you enable a descriptor for conforming, be aware of its limitations (see [[Using%20Advanced%20Unit%20of%20Work%20API%20(ELUG)|How to Use Conforming]]) and make sure that conforming is actually necessary.
+
Conforming can reduce performance. Before you enable a descriptor for conforming, be aware of its limitations (see [[Using%20Advanced%20Unit%20of%20Work%20API%20(ELUG)#How to Use Conforming|How to Use Conforming]]) and make sure that conforming is actually necessary.
  
 
For examples, see the following:
 
For examples, see the following:
 
* [[Using%20Advanced%20Unit%20of%20Work%20API%20(ELUG)#Using Conforming Queries and Descriptors|Using Conforming Queries and Descriptors]]
 
* [[Using%20Advanced%20Unit%20of%20Work%20API%20(ELUG)#Using Conforming Queries and Descriptors|Using Conforming Queries and Descriptors]]
* [[Using%20Advanced%20Unit%20of%20Work%20API%20(ELUG)|What You May Need to Know About Conforming Query Alternatives]]
+
* [[Using%20Advanced%20Unit%20of%20Work%20API%20(ELUG)#What You May Need to Know About Conforming Query Alternatives|What You May Need to Know About Conforming Query Alternatives]]
  
  
Line 542: Line 533:
 
# Select the Conform Results in Unit of Work option on the tab.
 
# Select the Conform Results in Unit of Work option on the tab.
  
Enable or disable conforming: when enabled, this feature ensures that any queries for this descriptor will conform the data source result with the current changes in the unit of work. For more information, see [[Using%20Advanced%20Unit%20of%20Work%20API%20(ELUG)|How to Use Conforming]].
+
Enable or disable conforming: when enabled, this feature ensures that any queries for this descriptor will conform the data source result with the current changes in the unit of work. For more information, see [[Using%20Advanced%20Unit%20of%20Work%20API%20(ELUG)#How to Use Conforming|How to Use Conforming]].
  
 
'''See Also'''
 
'''See Also'''
Line 560: Line 551:
  
 
<span id="Table 115-6"></span>
 
<span id="Table 115-6"></span>
''''' Descriptor Support for Descriptor Alias Configuration'''''
 
 
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Descriptor Alias Configuration" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support descriptor alias configuration." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Descriptor Alias Configuration" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support descriptor alias configuration." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
Line 583: Line 572:
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r4c1-t10" headers="r1c1-t10" align="left" |
 
| id="r4c1-t10" headers="r1c1-t10" align="left" |
EIS Descriptors <sup>Foot 1 </sup>
+
EIS Descriptors <sup> 1 </sup>
 
| headers="r4c1-t10 r1c2-t10" align="left" |
 
| headers="r4c1-t10 r1c2-t10" align="left" |
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
Line 597: Line 586:
 
|}
 
|}
  
<br><sup>Footnote 1 </sup>EIS root descriptors only (see [[Creating%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)|EIS Root Descriptors]]).<br>
+
<br><sup> 1 </sup>[[Creating%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#EIS Root Descriptors|EIS Root Descriptors]] only.<br>
  
  
 
{| class="Note oac_no_warn" width="80%" border="1" frame="hsides" rules="groups" cellpadding="3" frame="hsides" rules="groups"
 
{| class="Note oac_no_warn" width="80%" border="1" frame="hsides" rules="groups" cellpadding="3" frame="hsides" rules="groups"
 
| align="left" |
 
| align="left" |
'''Note:''' The alias is also used in JPA–it is the entity name. This is the logical name referenced in JP QL queries. It defaults to the class name without a path information.  
+
'''Note:''' The alias is also used in JPA – it is the entity name. This is the logical name referenced in JP QL queries. It defaults to the class name without a path information.  
 
For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20Java%20Persistence%20API%20(ELUG)|Introduction to Java Persistence API ]]
 
For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20Java%20Persistence%20API%20(ELUG)|Introduction to Java Persistence API ]]
 
|}
 
|}
Line 629: Line 618:
  
 
<span id="Table 115-7"></span>
 
<span id="Table 115-7"></span>
''''' Descriptor Support for Descriptor Comment Configuration'''''
 
  
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Descriptor Comment Configuration" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support descriptor comment configuration." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Descriptor Comment Configuration" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support descriptor comment configuration." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
Line 666: Line 654:
 
|}
 
|}
  
<br>
+
 
  
 
===How to Configure Descriptor Comments Using Workbench===
 
===How to Configure Descriptor Comments Using Workbench===
 
To create a comment for a descriptor, use this procedure:
 
To create a comment for a descriptor, use this procedure:
 
 
# In the '''Navigator''', select a descriptor.
 
# In the '''Navigator''', select a descriptor.
 
# Click the '''Descriptor Info''' tab in the Property window.<br>'''''Descriptor Info Tab, Comment Field'''''<br>[[Image:descomment.gif|Descriptor Info Tab, Comment Field]]<br><br>
 
# Click the '''Descriptor Info''' tab in the Property window.<br>'''''Descriptor Info Tab, Comment Field'''''<br>[[Image:descomment.gif|Descriptor Info Tab, Comment Field]]<br><br>
Line 678: Line 665:
  
 
==Configuring Named Queries at the Descriptor Level==
 
==Configuring Named Queries at the Descriptor Level==
A named query is a EclipseLink query that you create and store, by name, in a descriptor's <tt>DescriptorQueryManager</tt> for later retrieval and execution. Named queries improve application performance because they are prepared once and they (and all their associated supporting objects) can be efficiently reused thereafter making them well suited for frequently executed operations.
+
A named query is an EclipseLink query that you create and store, by name, in a descriptor's <tt>DescriptorQueryManager</tt> for later retrieval and execution. Named queries improve application performance because they are prepared once and they (and all their associated supporting objects) can be efficiently reused thereafter making them well suited for frequently executed operations.
  
If a named query is global to a <tt>Class</tt>, configure it at the descriptor level. Alternatively, you can configure a named query at the session level (see [[Configuring%20a%20Session%20(ELUG)|Configuring Named Queries at the Session Level]]).
+
If a named query is global to a <tt>Class</tt>, configure it at the descriptor level. Alternatively, you can [[Configuring%20a%20Session%20(ELUG)#Configuring Named Queries at the Session Level|configure a named query at the session level]].
  
 
Use named queries to specify SQL or EclipseLink <tt>Expression</tt> queries to access your data source.
 
Use named queries to specify SQL or EclipseLink <tt>Expression</tt> queries to access your data source.
Line 693: Line 680:
 
<br />
 
<br />
  
Using the Workbench, you can configure named queries for a subset of query types and store them in a descriptor's <tt>DescriptorQueryManager</tt> (see [[#How to Configure Named Queries at the Descriptor Level Using Workbench|Using the Workbench]]).
+
[[#How to Configure Named Queries at the Descriptor Level Using Workbench|Using the Workbench]], you can configure named queries for a subset of query types and store them in a descriptor's <tt>DescriptorQueryManager</tt>.
  
Using Java, you can create named queries for all query types and store them in a descriptor's <tt>DescriptorQueryManager</tt> (see [[#How to Configure Named Queries at the Descriptor Level Using Java|Using Java]]).
+
[[#How to Configure Named Queries at the Descriptor Level Using Java|Using Java]], you can create named queries for all query types and store them in a descriptor's <tt>DescriptorQueryManager</tt>.
  
 
This table summarizes which descriptors support named query configuration.
 
This table summarizes which descriptors support named query configuration.
Line 701: Line 688:
  
 
<span id="Table 115-8"></span>
 
<span id="Table 115-8"></span>
''''' Descriptor Support for Named Queries'''''
 
  
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Named Queries" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support for named queries." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Named Queries" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support for named queries." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
Line 710: Line 696:
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r2c1-t12" headers="r1c1-t12" align="left" |
 
| id="r2c1-t12" headers="r1c1-t12" align="left" |
Relational Descriptors<sup>Foot 1 </sup>
+
Relational Descriptors<sup> 1 </sup>
 
| headers="r2c1-t12 r1c2-t12" align="left" |
 
| headers="r2c1-t12 r1c2-t12" align="left" |
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
Line 724: Line 710:
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r4c1-t12" headers="r1c1-t12" align="left" |
 
| id="r4c1-t12" headers="r1c1-t12" align="left" |
EIS Descriptor<sup>Foot 2 </sup>
+
EIS Descriptor<sup> 2 </sup>
 
| headers="r4c1-t12 r1c2-t12" align="left" |
 
| headers="r4c1-t12 r1c2-t12" align="left" |
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
Line 738: Line 724:
 
|}
 
|}
  
<br><sup>Footnote 1 </sup>Relational class descriptors only (see [[Creating%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)|Creating Relational Class Descriptors]]).<br><sup>Footnote 2 </sup>EIS root descriptors only (see [[Creating%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)|EIS Root Descriptors]]).<br>
+
<br><sup> 1 </sup>[[Creating%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#Creating Relational Class Descriptors|Relational Class Descriptors]] only.<br><sup> 2 </sup>[[Creating%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#EIS Root Descriptors|EIS Root Descriptors]] only.<br>
  
After you create a named query, you can execute it by name and class on the EclipseLink session (see [[Using%20Basic%20Query%20API%20(ELUG)|Using Named Queries]]).
+
After you create a named query, you can execute it by name and class on the EclipseLink session (see [[Using%20Basic%20Query%20API%20(ELUG)#Using Named Queries|Using Named Queries]]).
  
For more information about named queries, see [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Queries%20(ELUG)|Named Queries]].
+
For more information about named queries, see [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Queries%20(ELUG)#Named Queries|Named Queries]].
  
  
  
 
===How to Configure Named Queries at the Descriptor Level Using Workbench===
 
===How to Configure Named Queries at the Descriptor Level Using Workbench===
 
 
To create a named query, use this procedure
 
To create a named query, use this procedure
 
 
# In the '''Navigator''', select a descriptor. Its properties appear in the Editor.
 
# In the '''Navigator''', select a descriptor. Its properties appear in the Editor.
 
# Click the '''Queries''' tab in the '''Editor'''. The Queries tab appear with three additional tabs.
 
# Click the '''Queries''' tab in the '''Editor'''. The Queries tab appear with three additional tabs.
# Click the '''Named Queries''' tab in the Queries tab. The Named Queries tab appears.<br>'''''Queries Tab–Named Queries Subtab'''''<br>[[Image:qrnmdfnd.gif|Queries Tab–Named Queries Subtab]]<br><br>
+
# Click the '''Named Queries''' tab in the Queries tab. The Named Queries tab appears.<br>'''''Queries Tab – Named Queries Subtab'''''<br>[[Image:qrnmdfnd.gif|Queries Tab – Named Queries Subtab]]<br><br>
 
# Complete each field on the Named Queries tab.
 
# Complete each field on the Named Queries tab.
  
Line 777: Line 761:
 
|}
 
|}
  
<br>
+
 
  
 
The Named Queries tab includes the following subtabs:
 
The Named Queries tab includes the following subtabs:
 
+
* '''General''' – See [[#Configuring Named Query Type and Parameters|Configuring Named Query Type and Parameters]].
* '''General'''–See [[#Configuring Named Query Type and Parameters|Configuring Named Query Type and Parameters]].
+
* '''Selection Criteria''' – See [[#Configuring Named Query Selection Criteria|Configuring Named Query Selection Criteria]].
* '''Selection Criteria'''–See [[#Configuring Named Query Selection Criteria]].
+
* '''Order''' – This tab appears for <tt>ReadAllQuery</tt> queries only. See [[#Configuring Read All Query Order|Configuring Read All Query Order]].
* '''Order'''–This tab appears for <tt>ReadAllQuery</tt> queries only. See [[#Configuring Read All Query Order|Configuring Read All Query Order]].
+
* '''Optimization''' – See [[#Configuring Named Query Optimization|Configuring Named Query Optimization]].
* '''Optimization'''–See [[#Configuring Named Query Optimization|Configuring Named Query Optimization]].
+
* '''Attributes''' – This tab appears for <tt>ReportQuery</tt> queries only. See [[#Configuring Named Query Attributes|Configuring Named Query Attributes]].
* '''Attributes'''–This tab appears for <tt>ReportQuery</tt> queries only. See [[#Configuring Named Query Attributes|Configuring Named Query Attributes]].
+
* '''Group/Order''' – This tab appears for <tt>ReportQuery</tt> queries only. [[#Configuring Named Query Group/Order Options|Configuring Named Query Group/Order Options]].
* '''Group/Order'''–This tab appears for <tt>ReportQuery</tt> queries only. [[#Configuring Named Query Group/Order Options|Configuring Named Query Group/Order Options]].
+
* '''Calls''' – This tab appears for EIS root descriptors only (for <tt>ReadAllQuery</tt> and <tt>ReadObjectQuery</tt> queries). See [[#Creating an EIS Interaction for a Named Query|Creating an EIS Interaction for a Named Query]].
* '''Calls'''–This tab appears for EIS root descriptors only (for <tt>ReadAllQuery</tt> and <tt>ReadObjectQuery</tt> queries). See [[#Creating an EIS Interaction for a Named Query|Creating an EIS Interaction for a Named Query]].
+
* '''Options''' – See [[#Configuring Named Query Options|Configuring Named Query Options]].
* '''Options'''–See [[#Configuring Named Query Options|Configuring Named Query Options]].
+
  
 
'''See Also'''
 
'''See Also'''
Line 817: Line 800:
 
* '''ReadAllQuery'''
 
* '''ReadAllQuery'''
 
* '''ReadObjectQuery'''
 
* '''ReadObjectQuery'''
* '''ReportQuery'''<sup>Foot 1 </sup>To create other types of query, you must use Java (see [[#How to Configure Named Queries at the Descriptor Level Using Java|Using Java]]).When you change the type of an existing query, Workbench preserves any configuration that is common between the old and new type and warns you if changing the type will result in the loss of configuration that is not shared by the new type.
+
* '''ReportQuery'''<sup> 1 </sup>
 +
To create other types of query, you must [[#How to Configure Named Queries at the Descriptor Level Using Java|use Java]].
 +
 
 +
When you change the type of an existing query, Workbench preserves any configuration that is common between the old and new type and warns you if changing the type will result in the loss of configuration that is not shared by the new type.
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r3c1-t15" headers="r1c1-t15" align="left" | '''Parameters'''
 
| id="r3c1-t15" headers="r1c1-t15" align="left" | '''Parameters'''
Line 834: Line 820:
 
|}
 
|}
  
<br><sup>Footnote 1 </sup>Relational descriptors only.<br>
+
<br><sup> 1 </sup>Relational descriptors only.<br>
  
 
'''See Also'''
 
'''See Also'''
Line 842: Line 828:
  
 
====Configuring Named Query Selection Criteria====
 
====Configuring Named Query Selection Criteria====
 
 
Use this tab to specify the format of the named query and enter the query string.
 
Use this tab to specify the format of the named query and enter the query string.
  
<br>
+
 
  
 
'''''Named Queries, Selection Criteria Tab'''''
 
'''''Named Queries, Selection Criteria Tab'''''
Line 859: Line 844:
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r2c1-t16" headers="r1c1-t16" align="left" | '''Type'''
 
| id="r2c1-t16" headers="r1c1-t16" align="left" | '''Type'''
| headers="r2c1-t16 r1c2-t16" align="left" | Specify if query uses a EclipseLink '''Expression''', '''SQL''', or '''EJB QL'''.
+
| headers="r2c1-t16 r1c2-t16" align="left" | Specify if query uses an EclipseLink '''Expression''', '''SQL''', or '''EJB QL'''.
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r3c1-t16" headers="r1c1-t16" align="left" | '''Expression''' or '''Query String'''
 
| id="r3c1-t16" headers="r1c1-t16" align="left" | '''Expression''' or '''Query String'''
 
| headers="r3c1-t16 r1c2-t16" align="left" |
 
| headers="r3c1-t16 r1c2-t16" align="left" |
If the '''Type''' is '''SQL''' or '''EJB QL''', enter the query string (either SQL or EJB QL). Workbench does not validate the query string.See a note that follows this table for information on query syntax.
+
If the '''Type''' is '''SQL''' or '''EJB QL''', enter the query string (either SQL or EJB QL). Workbench does not validate the query string.<br>See a note that follows this table for information on query syntax.
 
|}
 
|}
  
Line 870: Line 855:
 
{| class="Note oac_no_warn" width="80%" border="1" frame="hsides" rules="groups" cellpadding="3" frame="hsides" rules="groups"
 
{| class="Note oac_no_warn" width="80%" border="1" frame="hsides" rules="groups" cellpadding="3" frame="hsides" rules="groups"
 
| align="left" |
 
| align="left" |
''''''Note'''''<nowiki>:</nowiki> Use a combination of an escape character and a double-quote ( \" ) instead of just a double-quote ( " ) when defining your query using SQL or EJB QL. For example:   
+
'''''Note'''''<nowiki>:</nowiki> Use a combination of an escape character and a double-quote ( \" ) instead of just a double-quote ( " ) when defining your query using SQL or EJB QL. For example:   
 
  SELECT OBJECT(employee) FROM Employee employee WHERE employee.name = \"Bob\"
 
  SELECT OBJECT(employee) FROM Employee employee WHERE employee.name = \"Bob\"
 
If you fail to do so, the generated Java code would look as follows:  
 
If you fail to do so, the generated Java code would look as follows:  
Line 903: Line 888:
  
 
====Configuring Named Query Optimization====
 
====Configuring Named Query Optimization====
 
 
You can optimize a named query by configuring batch (<tt>ReadAllQuery</tt> only) or joining (<tt>ReadAllQuery</tt> and <tt>ReadObjectyQuery</tt>) attributes.
 
You can optimize a named query by configuring batch (<tt>ReadAllQuery</tt> only) or joining (<tt>ReadAllQuery</tt> and <tt>ReadObjectyQuery</tt>) attributes.
  
Line 920: Line 904:
  
 
Select one of the following actions for '''Batch Read Attributes''' (<tt>ReadAllQuery</tt> only):
 
Select one of the following actions for '''Batch Read Attributes''' (<tt>ReadAllQuery</tt> only):
 
 
* To add a new batch read attribute, click '''Add'''. The Add Batch Read Attribute dialog box appears. Select the mapped attribute and click '''OK'''.
 
* To add a new batch read attribute, click '''Add'''. The Add Batch Read Attribute dialog box appears. Select the mapped attribute and click '''OK'''.
 
* To change the order of the batch read attributes, select an existing attribute and click '''Up''' or '''Down'''.
 
* To change the order of the batch read attributes, select an existing attribute and click '''Up''' or '''Down'''.
Line 927: Line 910:
  
 
Select one of the following actions for '''Joined Attributes''' (<tt>ReadAllQuery</tt> and <tt>ReadObjectQuery</tt>):
 
Select one of the following actions for '''Joined Attributes''' (<tt>ReadAllQuery</tt> and <tt>ReadObjectQuery</tt>):
 
 
* To add a new joined attribute, click '''Add'''. The Add Joined Attribute dialog box appears.<br><span id="Figure 115-12"></span>''''' Add Joined Attribute Dialog Box'''''<br>[[Image:addjoin.gif|Add Joined Attribute Dialog Box]]<br><br>Select the mapped attribute. Optionally, enable or disable '''Allows Null''' or, for a <tt>Collection</tt> attribute, '''Allows None'''. Click '''OK'''.
 
* To add a new joined attribute, click '''Add'''. The Add Joined Attribute dialog box appears.<br><span id="Figure 115-12"></span>''''' Add Joined Attribute Dialog Box'''''<br>[[Image:addjoin.gif|Add Joined Attribute Dialog Box]]<br><br>Select the mapped attribute. Optionally, enable or disable '''Allows Null''' or, for a <tt>Collection</tt> attribute, '''Allows None'''. Click '''OK'''.
 
* To change the order of the joined attributes, select an existing attribute and click '''Up''' or '''Down'''.
 
* To change the order of the joined attributes, select an existing attribute and click '''Up''' or '''Down'''.
 
* To modify an existing joined attribute's options, select an existing attribute and click '''Edit'''.
 
* To modify an existing joined attribute's options, select an existing attribute and click '''Edit'''.
 
* To remove a joined attribute, select an existing attribute and click '''Remove'''.
 
* To remove a joined attribute, select an existing attribute and click '''Remove'''.
 +
 +
  
 
====Configuring Named Query Attributes====
 
====Configuring Named Query Attributes====
 
 
For <tt>ReportQuery</tt> queries only, you can configure report query functions to apply to one or more attributes.
 
For <tt>ReportQuery</tt> queries only, you can configure report query functions to apply to one or more attributes.
  
For more information about report queries, see [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Queries%20(ELUG)|Report Query]].
+
For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Queries%20(ELUG)#Report Query|Report Query]].
  
 
Use this tab to configure report query attributes.
 
Use this tab to configure report query attributes.
Line 948: Line 931:
  
 
Select one of the following actions for '''Attributes''' (<tt>ReportQuery</tt> only):
 
Select one of the following actions for '''Attributes''' (<tt>ReportQuery</tt> only):
 
+
* To add a new report query attribute, click '''Add'''. The Add Joined Attribute dialog box appears. Continue with [[#Adding Report Query Attributes|Adding Report Query Attributes]].
* To add a new report query attribute, click '''Add'''. The Add Joined Attribute dialog box appears. Continue with [[#Adding Report Query Attributes]].
+
 
* To change the order of the report query attribute attributes, select an existing attribute and click '''Up''' or '''Down'''.
 
* To change the order of the report query attribute attributes, select an existing attribute and click '''Up''' or '''Down'''.
 
* To modify an existing report query attribute's options, select an existing attribute and click '''Edit'''.
 
* To modify an existing report query attribute's options, select an existing attribute and click '''Edit'''.
Line 965: Line 947:
  
 
=====Adding Report Query Attributes=====
 
=====Adding Report Query Attributes=====
 
 
Use this dialog box to add a report query attribute.
 
Use this dialog box to add a report query attribute.
  
Line 983: Line 964:
 
| id="r2c1-t19" headers="r1c1-t19" align="left" | '''Allows None''' or '''Allows Null'''
 
| id="r2c1-t19" headers="r1c1-t19" align="left" | '''Allows None''' or '''Allows Null'''
 
| headers="r2c1-t19 r1c2-t19" align="left" |
 
| headers="r2c1-t19 r1c2-t19" align="left" |
Use the '''Allows Null''' and '''Allows None''' options to define an expression with an outer join. Check the '''Allows Null''' option to use the <tt>ExpressionBuilder</tt> method <tt>getAllowingNull</tt>.Check the '''Allows None''' option for <tt>Collection</tt> attributes to use the <tt>ExpressionBuilder</tt> method <tt>anyOfAllowingNone</tt>.For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Expressions%20(ELUG)|Using EclipseLink Expression API for Joins]].
+
Use the '''Allows Null''' and '''Allows None''' options to define an expression with an outer join. Check the '''Allows Null''' option to use the <tt>ExpressionBuilder</tt> method <tt>getAllowingNull</tt>.
 +
 
 +
Check the '''Allows None''' option for <tt>Collection</tt> attributes to use the <tt>ExpressionBuilder</tt> method <tt>anyOfAllowingNone</tt>.<br>For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Expressions%20(ELUG)|Using EclipseLink Expression API for Joins]].
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r3c1-t19" headers="r1c1-t19" align="left" | '''Function'''
 
| id="r3c1-t19" headers="r1c1-t19" align="left" | '''Function'''
Line 993: Line 976:
 
|}
 
|}
  
<br>
+
 
  
 
Enter the necessary information and click '''OK'''. Workbench adds the report query attribute to the list of attributes in the Attribute tab.
 
Enter the necessary information and click '''OK'''. Workbench adds the report query attribute to the list of attributes in the Attribute tab.
  
'''See Also'''
+
 
: [[#Configuring Named Query Attributes]]
+
  
 
====Configuring Named Query Group/Order Options====
 
====Configuring Named Query Group/Order Options====
 
 
For <tt>ReportQuery</tt> queries only, you can configure grouping and ordering attributes.
 
For <tt>ReportQuery</tt> queries only, you can configure grouping and ordering attributes.
  
For more information about report queries, see [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Queries%20(ELUG)|Report Query]].
+
For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Queries%20(ELUG)#Report Query|Report Query]].
  
 
Use this tab to specify grouping and ordering attributes.
 
Use this tab to specify grouping and ordering attributes.
Line 1,015: Line 996:
  
 
Select one of the following actions for '''Grouping Attributes''' (<tt>ReportQuery</tt> only):
 
Select one of the following actions for '''Grouping Attributes''' (<tt>ReportQuery</tt> only):
 
 
* To add a new grouping attribute, click '''Add'''. The Add Grouping Attribute dialog appears. Select the desired mapped attribute and click '''OK'''.
 
* To add a new grouping attribute, click '''Add'''. The Add Grouping Attribute dialog appears. Select the desired mapped attribute and click '''OK'''.
 
* To change the order of the grouping attributes, select an existing attribute and click '''Up''' or '''Down'''.
 
* To change the order of the grouping attributes, select an existing attribute and click '''Up''' or '''Down'''.
Line 1,022: Line 1,002:
  
 
Select one of the four following actions for '''Ordering Attributes''' (<tt>ReportQuery</tt> only):
 
Select one of the four following actions for '''Ordering Attributes''' (<tt>ReportQuery</tt> only):
 
 
* To add a new ordering attribute, click '''Add'''. The Add Ordering Attribute dialog box appears. Continue with [[#Adding Ordering Attributes|Adding Ordering Attributes]].
 
* To add a new ordering attribute, click '''Add'''. The Add Ordering Attribute dialog box appears. Continue with [[#Adding Ordering Attributes|Adding Ordering Attributes]].
 
* To change the order of the ordering attributes, select an existing attribute and click '''Up''' or '''Down'''.
 
* To change the order of the ordering attributes, select an existing attribute and click '''Up''' or '''Down'''.
Line 1,031: Line 1,010:
  
 
=====Adding Ordering Attributes=====
 
=====Adding Ordering Attributes=====
 
 
Use this dialog box to add a report query ordering attribute.
 
Use this dialog box to add a report query ordering attribute.
  
Line 1,066: Line 1,044:
 
: [[#Configuring Named Query Attributes|Configuring Named Query Attributes]]
 
: [[#Configuring Named Query Attributes|Configuring Named Query Attributes]]
  
====Creating an EIS Interaction for a Named Query====
 
  
 +
 +
====Creating an EIS Interaction for a Named Query====
 
For an EIS root descriptor, you can define EIS interactions to invoke methods on an EIS.
 
For an EIS root descriptor, you can define EIS interactions to invoke methods on an EIS.
  
Line 1,105: Line 1,084:
 
| id="r7c1-t21" headers="r1c1-t21" align="left" | '''Output Arguments'''
 
| id="r7c1-t21" headers="r1c1-t21" align="left" | '''Output Arguments'''
 
| headers="r7c1-t21 r1c2-t21" align="left" |
 
| headers="r7c1-t21 r1c2-t21" align="left" |
Specify the result record field or XPath nodes to map the correct nodes in the record used by the descriptor's mappings. For example, if you are using XML records, use this option to map the output <tt>fname</tt> to <tt>name/first-name</tt>.Output arguments are not required if the interaction returns an XML result that matches the descriptor's mappings.
+
Specify the result record field or XPath nodes to map the correct nodes in the record used by the descriptor's mappings. For example, if you are using XML records, use this option to map the output <tt>fname</tt> to <tt>name/first-name</tt>.
 +
 
 +
Output arguments are not required if the interaction returns an XML result that matches the descriptor's mappings.
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r8c1-t21" headers="r1c1-t21" align="left" | '''Input Result Path'''
 
| id="r8c1-t21" headers="r1c1-t21" align="left" | '''Input Result Path'''
Line 1,120: Line 1,101:
  
 
<br>
 
<br>
 +
  
 
====Configuring Named Query Options====
 
====Configuring Named Query Options====
 
 
Use this tab to configure additional options for the query.
 
Use this tab to configure additional options for the query.
  
Line 1,139: Line 1,120:
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r2c1-t22" headers="r1c1-t22" align="left" |
 
| id="r2c1-t22" headers="r1c1-t22" align="left" |
'''Refresh Identity Map Results'''<sup>Foot 2</sup>
+
'''Refresh Identity Map Results'''<sup> 2</sup>
 
| headers="r2c1-t22 r1c2-t22" align="left" | Refreshes the attributes of the object(s) resulting from the query. If cascading is used, the private parts of the objects will also be refreshed.
 
| headers="r2c1-t22 r1c2-t22" align="left" | Refreshes the attributes of the object(s) resulting from the query. If cascading is used, the private parts of the objects will also be refreshed.
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r3c1-t22" headers="r1c1-t22" align="left" |
 
| id="r3c1-t22" headers="r1c1-t22" align="left" |
'''Cache Statement'''<sup>Foot 1 </sup>
+
'''Cache Statement'''<sup> 1 </sup>
 
| headers="r3c1-t22 r1c2-t22" align="left" | Caches the prepared statements. This requires full parameter binding as well (see '''Bind Parameters''').
 
| headers="r3c1-t22 r1c2-t22" align="left" | Caches the prepared statements. This requires full parameter binding as well (see '''Bind Parameters''').
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r4c1-t22" headers="r1c1-t22" align="left" |
 
| id="r4c1-t22" headers="r1c1-t22" align="left" |
'''Bind Parameters'''<sup>Foot 1</sup>
+
'''Bind Parameters'''<sup> 1</sup>
 
| headers="r4c1-t22 r1c2-t22" align="left" |
 
| headers="r4c1-t22 r1c2-t22" align="left" |
 
By default, EclipseLink binds all of the query's parameters. Deselect this option to disable binding.
 
By default, EclipseLink binds all of the query's parameters. Deselect this option to disable binding.
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r5c1-t22" headers="r1c1-t22" align="left" |
 
| id="r5c1-t22" headers="r1c1-t22" align="left" |
'''Cache Usage'''<sup>Foot 2 </sup>
+
'''Cache Usage'''<sup> 2 </sup>
 
| headers="r5c1-t22 r1c2-t22" align="left" |
 
| headers="r5c1-t22 r1c2-t22" align="left" |
 
Selects how EclipseLink should use the session cache when a query is executed:
 
Selects how EclipseLink should use the session cache when a query is executed:
Line 1,162: Line 1,143:
 
* Check cache only
 
* Check cache only
 
* Conform results in unit of workFor more information, see the following:
 
* Conform results in unit of workFor more information, see the following:
* [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Queries%20(ELUG)|Configuring Cache Usage for In-Memory Queries]].
+
* [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Queries%20(ELUG)#Configuring Cache Usage for In-Memory Queries|Configuring Cache Usage for In-Memory Queries]].
 
* [[#Configuring Unit of Work Conforming at the Descriptor Level|Configuring Unit of Work Conforming at the Descriptor Level]]
 
* [[#Configuring Unit of Work Conforming at the Descriptor Level|Configuring Unit of Work Conforming at the Descriptor Level]]
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r6c1-t22" headers="r1c1-t22" align="left" |
 
| id="r6c1-t22" headers="r1c1-t22" align="left" |
'''In Memory Query Indirection'''<sup>Foot 2</sup>
+
'''In Memory Query Indirection'''<sup> 2</sup>
 
| headers="r6c1-t22 r1c2-t22" align="left" |
 
| headers="r6c1-t22 r1c2-t22" align="left" |
 
Selects how EclipseLink should handle indirection (lazy loading) when an in-memory or conforming query is executed:
 
Selects how EclipseLink should handle indirection (lazy loading) when an in-memory or conforming query is executed:
* Throw indirection exception–if this object uses indirection and indirection has not been triggered, EclipseLink will throw an exception.
+
* Throw indirection exception – if this object uses indirection and indirection has not been triggered, EclipseLink will throw an exception.
* Trigger indirection–if this object uses indirection and indirection has not been triggered, EclipseLink will trigger indirection.
+
* Trigger indirection – if this object uses indirection and indirection has not been triggered, EclipseLink will trigger indirection.
* Ignore exception return conformed–returns conforming if an untriggered value holder is encountered. That is, you expect results from the database to conform, and an untriggered value holder is taken to mean that the underlying attribute has not changed.
+
* Ignore exception return conformed – returns conforming if an untriggered value holder is encountered. That is, you expect results from the database to conform, and an untriggered value holder is taken to mean that the underlying attribute has not changed.
* Ignore exception return not conformed–returns not conforming if an untriggered value holder is encountered.For more information, see the following:
+
* Ignore exception return not conformed – returns not conforming if an untriggered value holder is encountered.
* [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Queries%20(ELUG)|Handling Exceptions Resulting from In-Memory Queries]].
+
 
* [[Introduction%20to%20Mappings%20(ELUG)|Indirection (Lazy Loading)]].
+
For more information, see the following:
 +
* [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Queries%20(ELUG)#Handling Exceptions Resulting from In-Memory Queries|Handling Exceptions Resulting from In-Memory Queries]].
 +
* [[Introduction%20to%20Mappings%20(ELUG)#Indirection (Lazy Loading)|Indirection (Lazy Loading)]].
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r7c1-t22" headers="r1c1-t22" align="left" |
 
| id="r7c1-t22" headers="r1c1-t22" align="left" |
'''Return Choice'''<sup>Foot 3 </sup>
+
'''Return Choice'''<sup> 3 </sup>
 
| headers="r7c1-t22 r1c2-t22" align="left" |
 
| headers="r7c1-t22 r1c2-t22" align="left" |
 
Selects how EclipseLink should handle <tt>ReportQuery</tt> results:
 
Selects how EclipseLink should handle <tt>ReportQuery</tt> results:
* Result collection–return <tt>ReportQuery</tt> results as a <tt>Collection</tt> of <tt>ReportQueryResult</tt> objects.
+
* Result collection – return <tt>ReportQuery</tt> results as a <tt>Collection</tt> of <tt>ReportQueryResult</tt> objects.
* Single result–return only the first <tt>ReportQueryResult</tt> object (not wrapped in a <tt>Collection</tt> or <tt>Map</tt>). Use this option if you know that the <tt>ReportQuery</tt> returns only one row.
+
* Single result – return only the first <tt>ReportQueryResult</tt> object (not wrapped in a <tt>Collection</tt> or <tt>Map</tt>). Use this option if you know that the <tt>ReportQuery</tt> returns only one row.
* Single value–return only a single value. Use this option if you know that the <tt>ReportQuery</tt> returns only one row that contains only one attribute.
+
* Single value – return only a single value. Use this option if you know that the <tt>ReportQuery</tt> returns only one row that contains only one attribute.
* Single attribute–return only a single <tt>Collection</tt> of values. If the query returns multiple rows, but each row only has a single attribute, this option will return a <tt>Collection</tt> of values, instead of a <tt>Collection</tt> of <tt>ReportQueryResults</tt>.For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Queries%20(ELUG)|Collection Query Results]].
+
* Single attribute – return only a single <tt>Collection</tt> of values. If the query returns multiple rows, but each row only has a single attribute, this option will return a <tt>Collection</tt> of values, instead of a <tt>Collection</tt> of <tt>ReportQueryResults</tt>.
 +
 
 +
For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Queries%20(ELUG)#Collection Query Results|Collection Query Results]].
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r8c1-t22" headers="r1c1-t22" align="left" |
 
| id="r8c1-t22" headers="r1c1-t22" align="left" |
'''Retrieve Primary Keys'''<sup>Foot 3</sup>
+
'''Retrieve Primary Keys'''<sup> 3</sup>
 
| headers="r8c1-t22 r1c2-t22" align="left" |
 
| headers="r8c1-t22 r1c2-t22" align="left" |
 
Selects whether or not EclipseLink retrieves the primary key values within each result. You can use the primary keys to retrieve the real objects.
 
Selects whether or not EclipseLink retrieves the primary key values within each result. You can use the primary keys to retrieve the real objects.
* None–do not retrieve primary keys
+
* None – do not retrieve primary keys
* All–retrieve primary keys for each object read;
+
* All – retrieve primary keys for each object read;
* First–return only the first primary key value (in the case of a composite primary key). This can be used if you just want to know if something exists or not, but do not really care about the value.
+
* First – return only the first primary key value (in the case of a composite primary key). This can be used if you just want to know if something exists or not, but do not really care about the value.
 
|}
 
|}
  
<br><sup>Footnote 1 </sup> For more information, see [[Optimizing%20the%20EclipseLink%20Application%20(ELUG)|How to Use Parameterized SQL (Parameter Binding) and Prepared Statement Caching for Optimization]].<br><sup>Footnote 2 </sup>For <tt>ReadObjectQuery</tt> and <tt>ReadAllQuery</tt> queries only.<br><sup>Footnote 3 </sup>For <tt>ReportQuery</tt> queries only.<br>
+
<br><sup> 1 </sup> For more information, see [[Optimizing%20the%20EclipseLink%20Application%20(ELUG)|How to Use Parameterized SQL (Parameter Binding) and Prepared Statement Caching for Optimization]].<br><sup> 2 </sup>For <tt>ReadObjectQuery</tt> and <tt>ReadAllQuery</tt> queries only.<br><sup> 3 </sup>For <tt>ReportQuery</tt> queries only.<br>
  
Click '''Advanced''' to configure additional options. See [[#Configuring Named Query Advanced Options]].
+
Click '''Advanced''' to configure additional options. See [[#Configuring Named Query Advanced Options|Configuring Named Query Advanced Options]].
  
 
'''See Also'''
 
'''See Also'''
 
: [[#Configuring Named Queries at the Descriptor Level|Configuring Named Queries at the Descriptor Level]]
 
: [[#Configuring Named Queries at the Descriptor Level|Configuring Named Queries at the Descriptor Level]]
 +
 +
  
 
====Configuring Named Query Advanced Options====
 
====Configuring Named Query Advanced Options====
 
 
To configure additional advanced query options, use this procedure.
 
To configure additional advanced query options, use this procedure.
  
# From the Named Queries – Options tab, click '''Advanced'''. The Advanced Query Options dialog box appears.From the Named Queries – Options tab, click '''Advanced'''. The Advanced Query Options dialog box appears.<br><span id="Figure 115-19"></span>''''' Advanced Query Options Dialog Box'''''<br>[[Image:advqropt.gif|Advanced Query Options Dialog Box]]<br><br>
+
# From the Named Queries Options tab, click '''Advanced'''. The Advanced Query Options dialog box appears.From the Named Queries Options tab, click '''Advanced'''. The Advanced Query Options dialog box appears.<br><span id="Figure 115-19"></span>''''' Advanced Query Options Dialog Box'''''<br>[[Image:advqropt.gif|Advanced Query Options Dialog Box]]<br><br>
 
# Complete each field in the Advanced Query Options dialog box.
 
# Complete each field in the Advanced Query Options dialog box.
  
Line 1,217: Line 1,203:
 
| id="r2c1-t23" headers="r1c1-t23" align="left" | '''Maintain Cache'''
 
| id="r2c1-t23" headers="r1c1-t23" align="left" | '''Maintain Cache'''
 
| headers="r2c1-t23 r1c2-t23" align="left" |
 
| headers="r2c1-t23 r1c2-t23" align="left" |
Specify whether to use the cache for the query or to build objects directly from the database result. You should only use this option if you are executing a partial object query (see [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Queries%20(ELUG)|Partial Object Queries]]), whose results cannot be cached. For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Queries%20(ELUG)|How to Disable the Identity Map Cache Update During a Read Query]].
+
Specify whether to use the cache for the query or to build objects directly from the database result. You should only use this option if you are executing a [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Queries%20(ELUG)#Partial Object Queries|Partial Object Query]], whose results cannot be cached. For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Queries%20(ELUG)#How to Disable the Identity Map Cache Update During a Read Query|How to Disable the Identity Map Cache Update During a Read Query]].
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r3c1-t23" headers="r1c1-t23" align="left" | '''Use Wrapper Policy'''
 
| id="r3c1-t23" headers="r1c1-t23" align="left" | '''Use Wrapper Policy'''
 
| headers="r3c1-t23 r1c2-t23" align="left" |
 
| headers="r3c1-t23 r1c2-t23" align="left" |
Specify whether or not the named query will use the wrapper policy configured for this descriptor. For more information, see [[#Configuring Wrapper Policy].
+
Specify whether or not the named query will use the wrapper policy configured for this descriptor. For more information, see [[#Configuring Wrapper Policy|Configuring Wrapper Policy]].
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r4c1-t23" headers="r1c1-t23" align="left" | '''Prepare SQL Once'''
 
| id="r4c1-t23" headers="r1c1-t23" align="left" | '''Prepare SQL Once'''
Line 1,231: Line 1,217:
 
| id="r5c1-t23" headers="r1c1-t23" align="left" | '''Cache Query Results'''
 
| id="r5c1-t23" headers="r1c1-t23" align="left" | '''Cache Query Results'''
 
| headers="r5c1-t23 r1c2-t23" align="left" |
 
| headers="r5c1-t23 r1c2-t23" align="left" |
Specify the <tt>cacheQueryResults</tt> method for the query. The query will only access the database the first time it is executed. Subsequent execution will return exactly the original result. For more information, see [[Using%20Advanced%20Query%20API%20(ELUG)|How to Cache Results in a ReadQuery]].
+
Specify the <tt>cacheQueryResults</tt> method for the query. The query will only access the database the first time it is executed. Subsequent execution will return exactly the original result. For more information, see [[Using%20Advanced%20Query%20API%20(ELUG)#How to Cache Results in a ReadQuery|How to Cache Results in a ReadQuery]].
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r6c1-t23" headers="r1c1-t23" align="left" | '''Refresh Remote Identity Map Results'''
 
| id="r6c1-t23" headers="r1c1-t23" align="left" | '''Refresh Remote Identity Map Results'''
Line 1,238: Line 1,224:
 
| id="r7c1-t23" headers="r1c1-t23" align="left" | '''Exclusive Connection'''
 
| id="r7c1-t23" headers="r1c1-t23" align="left" | '''Exclusive Connection'''
 
| headers="r7c1-t23 r1c2-t23" align="left" |
 
| headers="r7c1-t23 r1c2-t23" align="left" |
Specify whether or not the named query will use an exclusive connection. You can also configure exclusive connection acquisition at the session level (see [[Configuring%20a%20Session%20(ELUG)|Configuring Connection Policy]].
+
Specify whether or not the named query will use an exclusive connection. You can also configure exclusive connection acquisition at the session level (see [[Configuring%20a%20Session%20(ELUG)#Configuring Connection Policy|Configuring Connection Policy]].
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r8c1-t23" headers="r1c1-t23" align="left" | '''Pessimistic Locking'''
 
| id="r8c1-t23" headers="r1c1-t23" align="left" | '''Pessimistic Locking'''
Line 1,258: Line 1,244:
 
: [[#Configuring Named Queries at the Descriptor Level|Configuring Named Queries at the Descriptor Level]]
 
: [[#Configuring Named Queries at the Descriptor Level|Configuring Named Queries at the Descriptor Level]]
  
===How to Configure Named Queries at the Descriptor Level Using Java===
 
  
To configure named queries in Java, use a descriptor amendment method (see [[#Configuring Amendment Methods]]). [[#Example 115-1|Creating a Named Query with an Amendment Method]] illustrates an amendment method that creates a named query and adds it to the <tt>DescriptorQueryManager</tt>.
+
 
 +
===How to Configure Named Queries at the Descriptor Level Using Java===
 +
To configure named queries in Java, Use a [[#Configuring Amendment Methods|descriptor amendment method]]. The [[#Example 115-1|Creating a Named Query with an Amendment Method]] example illustrates an amendment method that creates a named query and adds it to the <tt>DescriptorQueryManager</tt>.
  
  
Line 1,283: Line 1,270:
  
 
==Configuring Query Timeout at the Descriptor Level==
 
==Configuring Query Timeout at the Descriptor Level==
 
 
You can specify how the EclipseLink runtime handles the duration of queries on a descriptor's reference class. Specifying a query timeout at the descriptor level applies to all queries on the descriptor's reference class. A query timeout ensures that your application does not block forever over a hung or lengthy query that does not return in a timely fashion.
 
You can specify how the EclipseLink runtime handles the duration of queries on a descriptor's reference class. Specifying a query timeout at the descriptor level applies to all queries on the descriptor's reference class. A query timeout ensures that your application does not block forever over a hung or lengthy query that does not return in a timely fashion.
  
Line 1,290: Line 1,276:
  
 
<span id="Table 115-9"></span>
 
<span id="Table 115-9"></span>
''''' Descriptor Support for Cache Refresh'''''
 
  
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Cache Refresh" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support for cache refresh." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Cache Refresh" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support for cache refresh." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
! id="r1c1-t24" align="left" valign="bottom" | '''Descriptor'''
 
! id="r1c1-t24" align="left" valign="bottom" | '''Descriptor'''
! id="r1c2-t24" align="left" valign="bottom" | '''[[#How to Configure Query Timeout at the Descriptor Level Workbench]]<br>'''
+
! id="r1c2-t24" align="left" valign="bottom" | '''[[#How to Configure Query Timeout at the Descriptor Level Workbench|Using the Workbench]]<br>'''
! id="r1c3-t24" align="left" valign="bottom" | '''[[#How to Configure Query Timeout at the Descriptor Level Java]]<br>'''
+
! id="r1c3-t24" align="left" valign="bottom" | '''[[#How to Configure Query Timeout at the Descriptor Level Java|Using Java]]<br>'''
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r2c1-t24" headers="r1c1-t24" align="left" |
 
| id="r2c1-t24" headers="r1c1-t24" align="left" |
Relational Descriptors <sup>Foot 1 </sup>
+
Relational Descriptors <sup> 1 </sup>
 
| headers="r2c1-t24 r1c2-t24" align="left" |
 
| headers="r2c1-t24 r1c2-t24" align="left" |
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
Line 1,327: Line 1,312:
 
|}
 
|}
  
<br><sup>Footnote 1 </sup>Relational class descriptors only (see [[Creating%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)|Creating Relational Class Descriptors]]).<br>
+
<br><sup> 1 </sup>[[Creating%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#Creating Relational Class Descriptors|Relational Class Descriptors]] only.<br>
  
 
You can also configure a timeout on a per-query basis. For more information, see the following:
 
You can also configure a timeout on a per-query basis. For more information, see the following:
 
+
* [[#Configuring Named Query Advanced Options|Configuring Named Query Advanced Options]]
* [[#Configuring Named Query Advanced Options]]
+
* [[Using%20Basic%20Query%20API%20(ELUG)#Configuring Query Timeout at the Query Level|Configuring Query Timeout at the Query Level]]
* [[Using%20Basic%20Query%20API%20(ELUG)|Configuring Query Timeout at the Query Level]]
+
  
  
  
 
===How to Configure Query Timeout at the Descriptor Level Workbench===
 
===How to Configure Query Timeout at the Descriptor Level Workbench===
 
 
To configure how EclipseLink handles the duration of queries to this descriptor, use this procedure:
 
To configure how EclipseLink handles the duration of queries to this descriptor, use this procedure:
 
 
# Select a descriptor in the '''Navigator'''. Its properties appear in the Editor.
 
# Select a descriptor in the '''Navigator'''. Its properties appear in the Editor.
 
# Click the '''Queries''' tab. The Queries tab appears.
 
# Click the '''Queries''' tab. The Queries tab appears.
Line 1,364: Line 1,346:
  
 
'''See Also'''
 
'''See Also'''
: [[#Configuring Query Timeout at the Descriptor Level]]
+
: [[#Configuring Query Timeout at the Descriptor Level|Configuring Query Timeout at the Descriptor Level]]
  
  
  
 
===How to Configure Query Timeout at the Descriptor Level Java===
 
===How to Configure Query Timeout at the Descriptor Level Java===
 
 
Use <tt>DescriptorQueryManager</tt> method <tt>setQueryTimeout</tt> passing in the timeout value as a number of milliseconds.
 
Use <tt>DescriptorQueryManager</tt> method <tt>setQueryTimeout</tt> passing in the timeout value as a number of milliseconds.
  
==Configuring Cache Refreshing==
 
  
 +
 +
==Configuring Cache Refreshing==
 
By default, EclipseLink caches objects read from a data source (see [[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)|Introduction to Cache]]). Subsequent queries for these objects will access the cache and thus improve performance by reducing data source access and avoiding the cost of rebuilding object's and their relationships. Even if a query, such as a read-all query, accesses the data source, if the objects corresponding to the records returned are in the cache, EclipseLink will use the cache objects.
 
By default, EclipseLink caches objects read from a data source (see [[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)|Introduction to Cache]]). Subsequent queries for these objects will access the cache and thus improve performance by reducing data source access and avoiding the cost of rebuilding object's and their relationships. Even if a query, such as a read-all query, accesses the data source, if the objects corresponding to the records returned are in the cache, EclipseLink will use the cache objects.
  
This can lead to stale data in the application. Although using an appropriate locking policy (see [[#Configuring Locking Policy]]) is the only way to ensure that stale or conflicting data does not get committed to the data source, sometimes certain data in the application changes so frequently that it is desirable to always refresh the data, instead of only refreshing the data when a conflict is detected.
+
This can lead to stale data in the application. Although using an appropriate [[#Configuring Locking Policy|locking policy]] is the only way to ensure that stale or conflicting data does not get committed to the data source, sometimes certain data in the application changes so frequently that it is desirable to always refresh the data, instead of only refreshing the data when a conflict is detected.
  
 
You can specify how the EclipseLink runtime handles cache refreshing for all queries on a descriptor's reference class.
 
You can specify how the EclipseLink runtime handles cache refreshing for all queries on a descriptor's reference class.
Line 1,383: Line 1,365:
  
  
<span id="'Table 115-10"></span.
+
<span id="'Table 115-10"></span>
'''' Descriptor Support for Query Cache Refresh'''''
+
  
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Query Cache Refresh" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support for Query Cache Refresh." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Query Cache Refresh" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support for Query Cache Refresh." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
Line 1,390: Line 1,371:
 
! id="r1c1-t26" align="left" valign="bottom" | '''Descriptor'''
 
! id="r1c1-t26" align="left" valign="bottom" | '''Descriptor'''
 
! id="r1c2-t26" align="left" valign="bottom" | '''[[#How to Configure Cache Refreshing Using Workbench|Using the Workbench]]<br>'''
 
! id="r1c2-t26" align="left" valign="bottom" | '''[[#How to Configure Cache Refreshing Using Workbench|Using the Workbench]]<br>'''
! id="r1c3-t26" align="left" valign="bottom" | '''[[#CHDFDJGJ1 How to Configure Cache Refreshing Using Java|Using Java]]<br>'''
+
! id="r1c3-t26" align="left" valign="bottom" | '''[[#How to Configure Cache Refreshing Using Java|Using Java]]<br>'''
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r2c1-t26" headers="r1c1-t26" align="left" |
 
| id="r2c1-t26" headers="r1c1-t26" align="left" |
Relational Descriptors <sup>Foot 1 </sup>
+
Relational Descriptors <sup> 1 </sup>
 
| headers="r2c1-t26 r1c2-t26" align="left" |
 
| headers="r2c1-t26 r1c2-t26" align="left" |
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
Line 1,407: Line 1,388:
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r4c1-t26" headers="r1c1-t26" align="left" |
 
| id="r4c1-t26" headers="r1c1-t26" align="left" |
EIS Descriptor[#sthref4461 <sup>Foot 2 </sup>]
+
EIS Descriptor <sup> 2 </sup>
 
| headers="r4c1-t26 r1c2-t26" align="left" |
 
| headers="r4c1-t26 r1c2-t26" align="left" |
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
Line 1,421: Line 1,402:
 
|}
 
|}
  
<br><sup>Footnote 1 </sup>Relational class descriptors only (see [[Creating%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)|Creating Relational Class Descriptors]]).<br><sup>Footnote 2 </sup>EIS root descriptors only (see [[Creating%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)|EIS Root Descriptors]]).<br>
+
<br><sup> 1 </sup>[[Creating%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#Creating Relational Class Descriptors|Relational Class Descriptors]] only.<br><sup> 2 </sup>[[Creating%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#EIS Root Descriptors|EIS Root Descriptors]] only.<br>
  
 
Configuring descriptor-level cache refresh may affect performance. As an alternative, consider configuring the following:
 
Configuring descriptor-level cache refresh may affect performance. As an alternative, consider configuring the following:
 +
* [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Queries%20(ELUG)#How to Refresh the Cache|cache refresh on a query-by-query basis]]
 +
* [[#Configuring Cache Expiration at the Descriptor Level|cache expiration]]
 +
* [[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)#Cache Isolation|isolated caching ]]
  
* cache refresh on a query-by-query basis (see [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Queries%20(ELUG)|How to Refresh the Cache]])
+
For more information, see [[Optimizing%20the%20EclipseLink%20Application%20(ELUG)#Optimizing Cache|Optimizing Cache]].
* cache expiration (see [[#Configuring Cache Expiration at the Descriptor Level]])
+
* isolated caching (see [[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)|Cache Isolation]])
+
 
+
For more information, see [[Optimizing%20the%20EclipseLink%20Application%20(ELUG)|Optimizing Cache]].
+
  
  
  
 
===How to Configure Cache Refreshing Using Workbench===
 
===How to Configure Cache Refreshing Using Workbench===
 
 
To configure how EclipseLink refreshes the cache for queries to this descriptor, use this procedure:
 
To configure how EclipseLink refreshes the cache for queries to this descriptor, use this procedure:
 
 
# Select a descriptor in the '''Navigator'''. Its properties appear in the Editor.
 
# Select a descriptor in the '''Navigator'''. Its properties appear in the Editor.
 
# Click the '''Queries''' tab. The Queries tab appears.
 
# Click the '''Queries''' tab. The Queries tab appears.
Line 1,451: Line 1,429:
 
| id="r2c1-t27" headers="r1c1-t27" align="left" | '''Always Refresh'''
 
| id="r2c1-t27" headers="r1c1-t27" align="left" | '''Always Refresh'''
 
| headers="r2c1-t27 r1c2-t27" align="left" |
 
| headers="r2c1-t27 r1c2-t27" align="left" |
Refreshes the cache on all queries. Avoids stale data by ensuring that any query that accesses the data source will refresh the resulting objects in the cache. This has no effect on queries that get a cache hit and never access the data source, such as read-object primary key queries or in-memory queries.Configuring descriptor level cache refresh may affect performance. As an alternative, consider configuring:
+
Refreshes the cache on all queries. Avoids stale data by ensuring that any query that accesses the data source will refresh the resulting objects in the cache. This has no effect on queries that get a cache hit and never access the data source, such as read-object primary key queries or in-memory queries.
* cache refresh on a query-by-query basis (see [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Queries%20(ELUG)#How to Refresh the Cache|How to Refresh the Cache]])
+
 
* cache expiration (see [[#Configuring Cache Expiration at the Descriptor Level|Configuring Cache Expiration at the Descriptor Level]])
+
Configuring descriptor level cache refresh may affect performance. As an alternative, consider configuring:
* isolated caching (see [[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)#Cache Isolation|Cache Isolation]])
+
* [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Queries%20(ELUG)#How to Refresh the Cache|cache refresh on a query-by-query basis]]
 +
* [[#Configuring Cache Expiration at the Descriptor Level|cache expiration]]
 +
* [[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)#Cache Isolation|isolated caching]]
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r3c1-t27" headers="r1c1-t27" align="left" | '''Only Refresh If Newer Version'''
 
| id="r3c1-t27" headers="r1c1-t27" align="left" | '''Only Refresh If Newer Version'''
 
| headers="r3c1-t27 r1c2-t27" align="left" |
 
| headers="r3c1-t27 r1c2-t27" align="left" |
Refreshes the cache only if the object in the database is newer than the object in the cache (as determined by the '''Optimistic Locking''' field). See [[#Configuring Locking Policy|Configuring Locking Policy]] for more information. Improves performance by avoiding unnecessary refreshing of an object if its version matches the data source version. This option does not cause refreshing on its own: you must use it in combination with '''Always Refresh''', query refreshing (see [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Queries%20(ELUG)#How to Refresh the Cache|How to Refresh the Cache]]), or cache expiration (see [[#Configuring Cache Expiration at the Descriptor Level|Configuring Cache Expiration at the Descriptor Level]]).
+
Refreshes the cache only if the object in the database is newer than the object in the cache (as determined by the '''Optimistic Locking''' field). See [[#Configuring Locking Policy|Configuring Locking Policy]] for more information. Improves performance by avoiding unnecessary refreshing of an object if its version matches the data source version. This option does not cause refreshing on its own: you must use it in combination with '''Always Refresh''', [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Queries%20(ELUG)#How to Refresh the Cache|query refreshing]], or [[#Configuring Cache Expiration at the Descriptor Level|cache expiration]].
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r4c1-t27" headers="r1c1-t27" align="left" | '''Disable Cache Hits'''
 
| id="r4c1-t27" headers="r1c1-t27" align="left" | '''Disable Cache Hits'''
 
| headers="r4c1-t27 r1c2-t27" align="left" |
 
| headers="r4c1-t27 r1c2-t27" align="left" |
When selected, EclipseLink bypasses the cache and goes to the database for read object queries based on primary key. Using this option in conjunction with '''Always Refresh''' ensures that EclipseLink always goes to the database. This option ensures that all queries including read-object primary key queries will always access the data source. This option does not cause refreshing on its own: you must use it in combination with '''Always Refresh'''.This option can cause a serious performance issue: avoid whenever possible.
+
When selected, EclipseLink bypasses the cache and goes to the database for read object queries based on primary key. Using this option in conjunction with '''Always Refresh''' ensures that EclipseLink always goes to the database. This option ensures that all queries including read-object primary key queries will always access the data source. This option does not cause refreshing on its own: you must use it in combination with '''Always Refresh'''.
 +
 
 +
This option can cause a serious performance issue: avoid whenever possible.
 
|}
 
|}
  
Line 1,469: Line 1,451:
 
{| class="Note oac_no_warn" width="80%" border="1" frame="hsides" rules="groups" cellpadding="3" frame="hsides" rules="groups"
 
{| class="Note oac_no_warn" width="80%" border="1" frame="hsides" rules="groups" cellpadding="3" frame="hsides" rules="groups"
 
| align="left" |
 
| align="left" |
'''Caution'''<nowiki>:</nowiki> Use the '''Always Refresh''' and '''Disable Cache Hits''' properties with caution as they may lead to poor performance. As an alternative, consider configuring cache refresh on a query-by-query basis (see [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Queries%20(ELUG)#How to Refresh the Cache|How to Refresh the Cache]]) or configuring cache expiration (see [[#Configuring Cache Expiration at the Descriptor Level|Configuring Cache Expiration at the Descriptor Level]]). For more information about cache performance, see [[Optimizing%20the%20EclipseLink%20Application%20(ELUG)#Optimizing Cache|Optimizing Cache]].
+
'''Caution'''<nowiki>:</nowiki> Use the '''Always Refresh''' and '''Disable Cache Hits''' properties with caution as they may lead to poor performance. As an alternative, consider [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Queries%20(ELUG)#How to Refresh the Cache|configuring cache refresh on a query-by-query basis]] or [[#Configuring Cache Expiration at the Descriptor Level|configuring cache expiration]]. For more information, see [[Optimizing%20the%20EclipseLink%20Application%20(ELUG)#Optimizing Cache|Optimizing Cache]].
 
|}
 
|}
  
 
<br>
 
<br>
  
===How to Configure Cache Refreshing Using Java===
 
  
Configure cache refresh options using the following <tt>ClassDescriptor</tt> methods:
 
  
 +
===How to Configure Cache Refreshing Using Java===
 +
Configure cache refresh options using the following <tt>ClassDescriptor</tt> methods:
 
* <tt>setShouldAlwaysRefreshCache</tt>
 
* <tt>setShouldAlwaysRefreshCache</tt>
 
* <tt>setShouldAlwaysRefreshCacheOnRemote</tt>
 
* <tt>setShouldAlwaysRefreshCacheOnRemote</tt>
Line 1,484: Line 1,466:
 
* <tt>setShouldOnlyRefreshCacheIfNewerVersion</tt>
 
* <tt>setShouldOnlyRefreshCacheIfNewerVersion</tt>
  
Use these methods in a descriptor amendment method (see [[#Configuring Amendment Methods]], as this example illustrates.
+
Use these methods in [[#Configuring Amendment Methods|a descriptor amendment method]], as this example illustrates.
  
  
Line 1,494: Line 1,476:
 
  }
 
  }
  
==Configuring Query Keys==
 
  
 +
 +
==Configuring Query Keys==
 
A '''query key''' is a schema-independent alias for a database field name. For example, consider a class <tt>Employee</tt> with attribute <tt>firstName</tt> mapped directly to a database field <tt>F_NAME</tt> in database table <tt>EMPLOYEE</tt>. Without a query key, when you create a query or expression that involves <tt>Employee</tt> attribute <tt>firstName</tt>, you must use the database management system-specific field name <tt>F_NAME</tt>. This makes it more difficult to build a query and ties the query to the schema. With a query key, you can refer to this field using a schema-independent alias, such as <tt>firstName</tt>.
 
A '''query key''' is a schema-independent alias for a database field name. For example, consider a class <tt>Employee</tt> with attribute <tt>firstName</tt> mapped directly to a database field <tt>F_NAME</tt> in database table <tt>EMPLOYEE</tt>. Without a query key, when you create a query or expression that involves <tt>Employee</tt> attribute <tt>firstName</tt>, you must use the database management system-specific field name <tt>F_NAME</tt>. This makes it more difficult to build a query and ties the query to the schema. With a query key, you can refer to this field using a schema-independent alias, such as <tt>firstName</tt>.
  
Line 1,502: Line 1,485:
  
 
<span id="Table 115-11"></span>
 
<span id="Table 115-11"></span>
''''' Descriptor Support for Query Keys'''''
 
  
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Query Keys" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support for query keys." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Query Keys" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support for query keys." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
Line 1,542: Line 1,524:
  
 
Using query keys offers the following advantages:
 
Using query keys offers the following advantages:
 
 
* Enhances code readability in EclipseLink expressions and simplifies expression development. You can compose expressions entirely within the context of your object model.
 
* Enhances code readability in EclipseLink expressions and simplifies expression development. You can compose expressions entirely within the context of your object model.
 
* Increases portability by making code independent of the database schema. If you rename a field in your schema, you can redefine the query key without changing any code that uses it.
 
* Increases portability by making code independent of the database schema. If you rename a field in your schema, you can redefine the query key without changing any code that uses it.
Line 1,549: Line 1,530:
 
Query keys are automatically generated for all mapped attributes. The name of the query key is the name of the class attribute specified in your object model.
 
Query keys are automatically generated for all mapped attributes. The name of the query key is the name of the class attribute specified in your object model.
  
For information on how to use query keys in queries and expressions, see [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Queries%20(ELUG)|Query Keys]].
+
For information on how to use query keys in queries and expressions, see [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Queries%20(ELUG)#Query Keys|Query Keys]].
  
 
When query keys are generated and how you can add or modify query keys depends on the type of mapping or descriptor involved:
 
When query keys are generated and how you can add or modify query keys depends on the type of mapping or descriptor involved:
 +
* [[#Direct Mappings|Direct Mappings]]
 +
* [[#Relationship Mappings|Relationship Mappings]]
 +
* [[#Interface Descriptors|Interface Descriptors]]
  
* [[#Direct Mappings]]
 
* [[#Relationship Mappings]]
 
* [[#Interface Descriptors]]
 
 
'''Direct Mappings'''
 
  
 +
==='''Direct Mappings'''===
 
Workbench automatically generates query keys for all direct mappings at the time you create the mapping.
 
Workbench automatically generates query keys for all direct mappings at the time you create the mapping.
  
 
Workbench provides support for adding or modifying query keys for simple unmapped attributes that could be mapped by a direct mapping: for example, the <tt>version</tt> field used for optimistic locking or the <tt>type</tt> field used for inheritance. You cannot modify or remove automatically generated query keys.
 
Workbench provides support for adding or modifying query keys for simple unmapped attributes that could be mapped by a direct mapping: for example, the <tt>version</tt> field used for optimistic locking or the <tt>type</tt> field used for inheritance. You cannot modify or remove automatically generated query keys.
  
'''Relationship Mappings'''
 
  
 +
==='''Relationship Mappings'''===
 
EclipseLink automatically generates query keys for all relationship mappings at run time.
 
EclipseLink automatically generates query keys for all relationship mappings at run time.
  
Line 1,571: Line 1,551:
 
The Workbench does not currently support adding or modifying the query keys for relationship mappings. If you must add or modify such a query key, you must do so in Java code, using a descriptor amendment method.
 
The Workbench does not currently support adding or modifying the query keys for relationship mappings. If you must add or modify such a query key, you must do so in Java code, using a descriptor amendment method.
  
'''Interface Descriptors'''
 
  
Interface descriptors (see [[Creating%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)|Creating Relational Interface Descriptors]]) define only the query keys that are shared among their implementors. In the descriptor for an interface, only the name of the query key is specified.
+
==='''Interface Descriptors'''===
 +
[[Creating%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#Creating Relational Interface Descriptors|Interface descriptors]] define only the query keys that are shared among their implementors. In the descriptor for an interface, only the name of the query key is specified.
  
Workbench provides support for choosing the implementors of an interface that share at least one common automatically generated query key (see [[#Configuring Interface Query Keys]]).
+
Workbench provides support for choosing the implementors of an interface that share at least one common automatically generated [[#Configuring Interface Query Keys|query key]].
  
  
  
 
===How to Configure Query Keys Using Workbench===
 
===How to Configure Query Keys Using Workbench===
 
 
To add query keys to simple unmapped fields and to view the query keys automatically generated for directly mapped attributes, use this procedure:
 
To add query keys to simple unmapped fields and to view the query keys automatically generated for directly mapped attributes, use this procedure:
 
 
# Select a descriptor in the '''Navigator'''. Its properties appear in the Editor.
 
# Select a descriptor in the '''Navigator'''. Its properties appear in the Editor.
# Click the '''Query Keys''' tab in the '''Editor'''.<br><span id="Figure 115-22"></span>''''' Queries, Query Keys Tab'''''<br>[[Image:querykey.gif|Queries, Query Keys Tab"]<br><br>
+
# Click the '''Query Keys''' tab in the '''Editor'''.<br><span id="Figure 115-22"></span>''''' Queries, Query Keys Tab'''''<br>[[Image:querykey.gif|Queries, Query Keys Tab]]<br><br>
  
 
To add a new query key, click '''Add.'''
 
To add a new query key, click '''Add.'''
Line 1,594: Line 1,572:
 
Use the '''Field''' list to select the field in the table associated with the query key.
 
Use the '''Field''' list to select the field in the table associated with the query key.
  
===How to Configure Query Keys Using Java===
 
  
To manually create a relationship query key, implement a descriptor amendment method (see [[#Configuring Amendment Methods|Configuring Amendment Methods]]) that uses one of the following <tt>ClassDescriptor</tt> methods to register the query keys:
 
  
* <tt>addQueryKey</tt>–specify a query key using an instance of <tt>QueryKey</tt> such as <tt>DirectQueryKey</tt>, <tt>DirectCollectionQueryKey</tt>, <tt>ManyToManyQueryKey</tt>, <tt>OneToManyQueryKey</tt>, or <tt>OneToOneQueryKey</tt>.
+
===How to Configure Query Keys Using Java===
* <tt>addDirectQueryKey</tt>–add a query key that maps directly to the given database field.
+
To manually create a relationship query key, implement a [[#Configuring Amendment Methods|descriptor amendment method]] that uses one of the following <tt>ClassDescriptor</tt> methods to register the query keys:
* <tt>addAbstractQueryKey</tt>–add an abstract query key to an interface descriptor. Any implementors of that interface must define the query key defined by this abstract query key.
+
 
 +
* <tt>addQueryKey</tt> – specify a query key using an instance of <tt>QueryKey</tt> such as <tt>DirectQueryKey</tt>, <tt>DirectCollectionQueryKey</tt>, <tt>ManyToManyQueryKey</tt>, <tt>OneToManyQueryKey</tt>, or <tt>OneToOneQueryKey</tt>.
 +
* <tt>addDirectQueryKey</tt> – add a query key that maps directly to the given database field.
 +
* <tt>addAbstractQueryKey</tt> – add an abstract query key to an interface descriptor. Any implementors of that interface must define the query key defined by this abstract query key.
  
[[#Example 115-3|Defining a Query Key]], [[#Example 115-4|Defining a One-to-Many Query Key]], and [[#Example 115-5|Defining a Many-to-Many Query Key]] illustrate how to define a query key in Java code.
+
The [[#Example 115-3|Defining a Query Key]], [[#Example 115-4|Defining a One-to-Many Query Key]], and [[#Example 115-5|Defining a Many-to-Many Query Key]] examples illustrate how to define a query key in Java code.
  
  
Line 1,648: Line 1,627:
 
  ExpressionBuilder builder = new ExpressionBuilder();
 
  ExpressionBuilder builder = new ExpressionBuilder();
 
  projectsQueryKey.setJoinCriteria(
 
  projectsQueryKey.setJoinCriteria(
     builder.getTable("EMP_PROJ").getField("EMP_ID").equal(
+
     (builder.getParameter("EMPLOYEE.EMP_ID").equal(
     builder.getParameter("EMPLOYEE.EMP_ID").and(
+
     builder.getTable("EMP_PROJ").getField("EMP_ID")).and(
 
     builder.getTable("EMP_PROJ").getField("PROJ_ID").equal(
 
     builder.getTable("EMP_PROJ").getField("PROJ_ID").equal(
     builder.getField("PROJECT.PROJ_ID")));
+
     builder.getField("PROJECT.PROJ_ID")))));
 
  descriptor.addQueryKey(projectsQueryKey);
 
  descriptor.addQueryKey(projectsQueryKey);
 
   
 
   
Line 1,657: Line 1,636:
  
  
[[#Example 115-6|Defining a One-to-One Query Key with an Amendment Method]] illustrates how to implement a <tt>Descriptor</tt> amendment method to define a one-to-one query key. In this example, the object model for the <tt>Address</tt> class does not include a reference to its owner, an <tt>Employee</tt> object. You can amend the <tt>Address</tt> class descriptor to add a query key named <tt>owner</tt> to make up for this deficiency. At run time, you can compose expressions that select <tt>Address</tt> objects based on this <tt>owner</tt> query key.
+
The [[#Example 115-6|Defining a One-to-One Query Key with an Amendment Method]] example illustrates how to implement a <tt>Descriptor</tt> amendment method to define a one-to-one query key. In this example, the object model for the <tt>Address</tt> class does not include a reference to its owner, an <tt>Employee</tt> object. You can amend the <tt>Address</tt> class descriptor to add a query key named <tt>owner</tt> to make up for this deficiency. At run time, you can compose expressions that select <tt>Address</tt> objects based on this <tt>owner</tt> query key.
  
  
Line 1,677: Line 1,656:
  
 
==Configuring Interface Query Keys==
 
==Configuring Interface Query Keys==
 
 
A query key is a schema independent alias for a database field name. For more information about query keys, see [[#Configuring Query Keys|Configuring Query Keys]].
 
A query key is a schema independent alias for a database field name. For more information about query keys, see [[#Configuring Query Keys|Configuring Query Keys]].
  
Interface descriptors (see [[Creating%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#Creating Relational Interface Descriptors|Creating Relational Interface Descriptors]]) are defined only with query keys that are shared among their implementors. In the descriptor for an interface, only the name of the query key is specified.
+
[[Creating%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#Creating Relational Interface Descriptors|Interface descriptors]] are defined only with query keys that are shared among their implementors. In the descriptor for an interface, only the name of the query key is specified.
  
 
In each implementor descriptor, the key must be defined with the appropriate field from one of the implementor descriptor's tables.
 
In each implementor descriptor, the key must be defined with the appropriate field from one of the implementor descriptor's tables.
Line 1,692: Line 1,670:
  
 
<span id="Table 115-12"></span>
 
<span id="Table 115-12"></span>
''''' Descriptor Support for Interface Query Keys'''''
 
 
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Interface Query Keys" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support for interface query keys." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Interface Query Keys" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support for interface query keys." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
Line 1,794: Line 1,770:
 
  phoneClassDescriptor.addDirectMapping("number", "P_NUM");
 
  phoneClassDescriptor.addDirectMapping("number", "P_NUM");
  
==Configuring Cache Type and Size at the Descriptor Level==
 
  
The EclipseLink cache is an in-memory repository that stores recently read or written objects based on class and primary key values. EclipseLink uses the cache to do the following:
 
  
 +
==Configuring Cache Type and Size at the Descriptor Level==
 +
The EclipseLink cache is an in-memory repository that stores recently read or written objects based on class and primary key values. EclipseLink uses the cache to do the following:
 
* improve performance by holding recently read or written objects and accessing them in-memory to minimize database access;
 
* improve performance by holding recently read or written objects and accessing them in-memory to minimize database access;
 
* manage locking and isolation level;
 
* manage locking and isolation level;
Line 1,806: Line 1,782:
  
 
<span id="Table 115-13"></span>
 
<span id="Table 115-13"></span>
''''' Descriptor Support for Identity Map'''''
 
  
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Identity Map" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support identity map." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Identity Map" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support identity map." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
Line 1,815: Line 1,790:
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r2c1-t31" headers="r1c1-t31" align="left" |
 
| id="r2c1-t31" headers="r1c1-t31" align="left" |
Relational Descriptors<sup>Foot 1 </sup>
+
Relational Descriptors<sup> 1 </sup>
 
| headers="r2c1-t31 r1c2-t31" align="left" |
 
| headers="r2c1-t31 r1c2-t31" align="left" |
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
Line 1,829: Line 1,804:
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r4c1-t31" headers="r1c1-t31" align="left" |
 
| id="r4c1-t31" headers="r1c1-t31" align="left" |
EIS Descriptors <sup>Foot 2 </sup>
+
EIS Descriptors <sup> 2 </sup>
 
| headers="r4c1-t31 r1c2-t31" align="left" |
 
| headers="r4c1-t31 r1c2-t31" align="left" |
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
Line 1,843: Line 1,818:
 
|}
 
|}
  
<br><sup>Footnote 1 </sup>Relational class descriptors only (see [[Creating%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)|Creating Relational Class Descriptors]]).<br><sup>Footnote 2 </sup>EIS root descriptors only (see [[Creating%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)|EIS Root Descriptors].<br>
+
<br><sup> 1 </sup>[[Creating%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#Creating Relational Class Descriptors|Relational Class Descriptors]] only.<br><sup> 2 </sup>[[Creating%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#EIS Root Descriptors|EIS Root Descriptors]] only.<br>
  
This configuration overrides the default identity map configuration defined at the project level (see [[Configuring%20a%20Project%20(ELUG)|Configuring Cache Type and Size at the Project Level]]).
+
This configuration overrides the default identity map configuration [[Configuring%20a%20Project%20(ELUG)#Configuring Cache Type and Size at the Project Level|defined at the project level]].
  
For detailed information on caching and object identity, and the recommended settings to maximize EclipseLink performance, see to [[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)|Cache Type and Object Identity]].
+
For detailed information on caching and object identity, and the recommended settings to maximize EclipseLink performance, see to [[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)#Cache Type and Object Identity|Cache Type and Object Identity]].
  
For more information about the cache, see [[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)|Introduction to Cache]].
+
For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)|Introduction to Cache]].
  
  
Line 1,872: Line 1,847:
 
| headers="r2c1-t32 r1c2-t32" align="left" |
 
| headers="r2c1-t32 r1c2-t32" align="left" |
 
Use the '''Type''' list to choose the identity map as follows:
 
Use the '''Type''' list to choose the identity map as follows:
* '''Weak with Soft Subcache''' (<tt>SoftCacheWeakIdentityMap</tt>)–cache first ''n'' elements in soft space, anything after that in weak space (see [[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)|Soft Cache Weak Identity Map and Hard Cache Weak Identity Map]])
+
* '''Weak with Soft Subcache''' (<tt>SoftCacheWeakIdentityMap</tt>) – cache first ''n'' elements in soft space, anything after that in weak space (see [[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)#Soft Cache Weak Identity Map and Hard Cache Weak Identity Map|Soft Cache Weak Identity Map and Hard Cache Weak Identity Map]])
* '''Weak with Hard Subcache''' (<tt>HardCacheWeakIdentityMap</tt>)–cache first ''n'' elements in hard space, anything after that in weak space (see [[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)|Soft Cache Weak Identity Map and Hard Cache Weak Identity Map]])
+
* '''Weak with Hard Subcache''' (<tt>HardCacheWeakIdentityMap</tt>) – cache first ''n'' elements in hard space, anything after that in weak space (see [[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)#Soft Cache Weak Identity Map and Hard Cache Weak Identity Map|Soft Cache Weak Identity Map and Hard Cache Weak Identity Map]])
* '''Weak''' (<tt>WeakIdentityMap</tt>)–cache everything in weak space (see [[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)|Weak Identity Map]])
+
* '''Weak''' ([[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)#Weak Identity Map|<tt>WeakIdentityMap</tt>]]) – cache everything in weak space
* '''Soft''' (<tt>SoftIdentityMap</tt>)–cache everything in soft space(see [[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)|Soft Identity Map]])
+
* '''Soft''' ([[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)#Soft Identity Map|<tt>SoftIdentityMap</tt>]]) – cache everything in soft space
* '''Full''' (<tt>FullIdentityMap</tt>)–cache everything permanently (see [[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)|Full Identity Map]])
+
* '''Full''' ([[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)#Full Identity Map|<tt>FullIdentityMap</tt>]]) – cache everything permanently
* '''None''' (<tt>NoIdentityMap</tt>)–cache nothing (see [[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)|No Identity Map]]).
+
* '''None''' ([[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)#No Identity Map|<tt>NoIdentityMap</tt>]]) – cache nothing.
For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)|Cache Type and Object Identity]].
+
 
 +
For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)#Cache Type and Object Identity|Cache Type and Object Identity]].
  
 
Changing the project's default identity map does not affect descriptors that already exist in the project.
 
Changing the project's default identity map does not affect descriptors that already exist in the project.
Line 1,893: Line 1,869:
 
|}
 
|}
  
<br><sup>Footnote 1 </sup>If a descriptor is a child in an inheritance hierarchy, EclipseLink makes this field read only and displays the options from the parent root descriptor.<br>
+
<br><sup> 1 </sup>If a descriptor is a child in an inheritance hierarchy, EclipseLink makes this field read only and displays the options from the parent root descriptor.<br>
  
===How to Configure Cache Type and Size at the Descriptor Level Using Java===
 
  
 +
===How to Configure Cache Type and Size at the Descriptor Level Using Java===
 
Use one of the following <tt>ClassDescriptor</tt> methods to configure the descriptor to use the appropriate type of identity map:
 
Use one of the following <tt>ClassDescriptor</tt> methods to configure the descriptor to use the appropriate type of identity map:
 
 
* <tt>useFullIdentitMap</tt>
 
* <tt>useFullIdentitMap</tt>
 
* <tt>useWeakIdentityMap</tt>
 
* <tt>useWeakIdentityMap</tt>
Line 1,908: Line 1,883:
 
Use the <tt>ClassDescriptor</tt> method <tt>setIdentityMapSize</tt> to configure the size of the identity map.
 
Use the <tt>ClassDescriptor</tt> method <tt>setIdentityMapSize</tt> to configure the size of the identity map.
  
==Configuring Cache Isolation at the Descriptor Level==
 
  
If you plan to use isolated sessions (see [[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)|Cache Isolation]]), you must configure descriptors as isolated for any object that you want confined to an isolated session cache.
+
==Configuring Cache Isolation at the Descriptor Level==
 +
If you plan to use [[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)#Cache Isolation|isolated sessions]], you must configure descriptors as isolated for any object that you want confined to an isolated session cache.
  
 
Configuring a descriptor to be isolated means that EclipseLink will not store the object in the shared session cache and the object will not be shared across client sessions. Each client will have their own object read directly from the database. Objects in an isolated client session cache can reference objects in their parent server session's shared session cache, but no objects in the shared session cache can reference objects in an isolated client session cache. Isolation is required when using Oracle Database Virtual Private Database (VPD) support or database user-based read security. Isolation can also be used if caching is not desired across client sessions.
 
Configuring a descriptor to be isolated means that EclipseLink will not store the object in the shared session cache and the object will not be shared across client sessions. Each client will have their own object read directly from the database. Objects in an isolated client session cache can reference objects in their parent server session's shared session cache, but no objects in the shared session cache can reference objects in an isolated client session cache. Isolation is required when using Oracle Database Virtual Private Database (VPD) support or database user-based read security. Isolation can also be used if caching is not desired across client sessions.
Line 1,918: Line 1,893:
  
 
<span id="Table 115-14"></span>
 
<span id="Table 115-14"></span>
''''' Descriptor Support for Cache Isolation Map'''''
 
  
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Cache Isolation Map" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support cache isolation map" width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Cache Isolation Map" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support cache isolation map" width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
Line 1,927: Line 1,901:
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r2c1-t33" headers="r1c1-t33" align="left" |
 
| id="r2c1-t33" headers="r1c1-t33" align="left" |
Relational Descriptors <sup>Foot 1 </sup>
+
Relational Descriptors <sup> 1 </sup>
 
| headers="r2c1-t33 r1c2-t33" align="left" |
 
| headers="r2c1-t33 r1c2-t33" align="left" |
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
Line 1,941: Line 1,915:
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r4c1-t33" headers="r1c1-t33" align="left" |
 
| id="r4c1-t33" headers="r1c1-t33" align="left" |
EIS Descriptors <sup>Foot 2 </sup>
+
EIS Descriptors <sup> 2 </sup>
 
| headers="r4c1-t33 r1c2-t33" align="left" |
 
| headers="r4c1-t33 r1c2-t33" align="left" |
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
Line 1,955: Line 1,929:
 
|}
 
|}
  
<br><sup>Footnote 1 </sup>Relational class descriptors only (see [[Creating%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)|Creating Relational Class Descriptors]).<br><sup>Footnote 2 </sup>EIS root descriptors only (see [[Creating%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)|EIS Root Descriptors]]).<br>
+
<br><sup> 1 </sup>[[Creating%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#Creating Relational Class Descriptors|Relational Class Descriptors]] only.<br><sup> 2 </sup>[[Creating%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#EIS Root Descriptors|EIS Root Descriptors]] only.<br>
  
This configuration overrides the default cache isolation configuration defined at the project level (see [[Configuring%20a%20Project%20(ELUG)|Configuring Cache Isolation at the Project Level]]).
+
This configuration overrides the default cache isolation configuration [[Configuring%20a%20Project%20(ELUG)#Configuring Cache Isolation at the Project Level|defined at the project level]].
  
 
<br>
 
<br>
Line 1,963: Line 1,937:
 
{| class="Note oac_no_warn" width="80%" border="1" frame="hsides" rules="groups" cellpadding="3" frame="hsides" rules="groups"
 
{| class="Note oac_no_warn" width="80%" border="1" frame="hsides" rules="groups" cellpadding="3" frame="hsides" rules="groups"
 
| align="left" |
 
| align="left" |
'''Note:''' If you configure a descriptor as isolated, it cannot participate in a coordinated cache (see [[#Configuring Cache Coordination Change Propagation at the Descriptor Level]]).
+
'''Note:''' If you configure a descriptor as isolated, it cannot participate in a coordinated cache (see [[#Configuring Cache Coordination Change Propagation at the Descriptor Level|Configuring Cache Coordination Change Propagation at the Descriptor Level]]).
 
|}
 
|}
  
<br>
+
 
  
 
===How to Configure Cache Isolation at the Descriptor Level Using Workbench===
 
===How to Configure Cache Isolation at the Descriptor Level Using Workbench===
 
 
To specify the cache isolation options, use this procedure:
 
To specify the cache isolation options, use this procedure:
 
 
# Select the descriptor in the '''Navigator'''.
 
# Select the descriptor in the '''Navigator'''.
 
# Select the '''Caching''' tab in the '''Editor'''. The Caching tab appears.<br>'''''Caching Tab, Isolation Options'''''<br>[[Image:desisol.gif|Caching Tab, Isolation Options]]<br><br>
 
# Select the '''Caching''' tab in the '''Editor'''. The Caching tab appears.<br>'''''Caching Tab, Isolation Options'''''<br>[[Image:desisol.gif|Caching Tab, Isolation Options]]<br><br>
Line 1,977: Line 1,949:
  
 
Use the '''Isolation''' list to choose one of the following:
 
Use the '''Isolation''' list to choose one of the following:
 
+
* '''Isolated''' – if you want all objects confined to an isolated client session cache. For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)#Cache Isolation|Cache Isolation]].
* '''Isolated'''–if you want all objects confined to an isolated client session cache. For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)|Cache Isolation]].
+
* '''Shared''' – if you want all objects visible in the shared session cache (default).
* '''Shared'''–if you want all objects visible in the shared session cache (default).
+
  
  
  
 
===How to Configure Cache Isolation at the Descriptor Level Using Java===
 
===How to Configure Cache Isolation at the Descriptor Level Using Java===
 +
To specify that a class is isolated, Use a [[#Configuring Amendment Methods|descriptor amendment method]] to call <tt>ClassDescriptor</tt> method <tt>setIsIsolated</tt>, passing in a <tt>boolean</tt> of <tt>true</tt>.
  
To specify that a class is isolated, use a descriptor amendment method (see [[#Configuring Amendment Methods]]) to call <tt>ClassDescriptor</tt> method <tt>setIsIsolated</tt>, passing in a <tt>boolean</tt> of <tt>true</tt>.
 
  
==Configuring Unit of Work Cache Isolation at the Descriptor Level==
 
  
 +
==Configuring Unit of Work Cache Isolation at the Descriptor Level==
 
Use this policy to determine how a unit of work uses a session cache for a specific class. This table lists the unit of work cache isolation options.
 
Use this policy to determine how a unit of work uses a session cache for a specific class. This table lists the unit of work cache isolation options.
  
  
 
<span id="Table 115-15"></span>
 
<span id="Table 115-15"></span>
''''' Unit of Work Cache Isolation Options'''''
 
 
 
{| class="HRuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Unit of Work Cache Isolation Options" summary="This table lists the unit of work cache isolation options." width="100%" border="1" frame="hsides" rules="rows" cellpadding="3" frame="hsides" rules="rows"
 
{| class="HRuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Unit of Work Cache Isolation Options" summary="This table lists the unit of work cache isolation options." width="100%" border="1" frame="hsides" rules="rows" cellpadding="3" frame="hsides" rules="rows"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
Line 2,003: Line 1,972:
 
Using the Session Cache After the Transaction
 
Using the Session Cache After the Transaction
 
| headers="r2c1-t35 r1c2-t35" align="left" |
 
| headers="r2c1-t35 r1c2-t35" align="left" |
<tt>USE_SESSION_CACHE_AFTER_TRANSACTION</tt>Objects built from new data accessed after a unit of work early transaction are stored in the session cache.This options is the most efficient as it allows the cache to be used after an early transaction.
+
<tt>USE_SESSION_CACHE_AFTER_TRANSACTION</tt>
 +
 
 +
Objects built from new data accessed after a unit of work early transaction are stored in the session cache.This options is the most efficient as it allows the cache to be used after an early transaction.
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r3c1-t35" headers="r1c1-t35" align="left" |
 
| id="r3c1-t35" headers="r1c1-t35" align="left" |
 
Isolating New Data After the Transaction
 
Isolating New Data After the Transaction
 
| headers="r3c1-t35 r1c2-t35" align="left" |
 
| headers="r3c1-t35 r1c2-t35" align="left" |
<tt>ISOLATE_NEW_DATA_AFTER_TRANSACTION</tt> (default) Objects built from new data accessed after a unit of work early transaction are only stored in the unit of work.
+
<tt>ISOLATE_NEW_DATA_AFTER_TRANSACTION</tt> (default)  
 +
 
 +
Objects built from new data accessed after a unit of work early transaction are only stored in the unit of work.
  
 
This still allows previously cached objects to be accessed in the unit of work after an early transaction, while ensuring that uncommitted data will never be put in the session cache by storing any object built from new data only in the unit of work
 
This still allows previously cached objects to be accessed in the unit of work after an early transaction, while ensuring that uncommitted data will never be put in the session cache by storing any object built from new data only in the unit of work
Line 2,017: Line 1,990:
 
<tt>ISOLATE_CACHE_AFTER_TRANSACTION</tt>After a unit of work early transaction the session cache is no longer used for this class. Objects are directly built from the database data and only stored in the unit of work, ''even if previously cached''.
 
<tt>ISOLATE_CACHE_AFTER_TRANSACTION</tt>After a unit of work early transaction the session cache is no longer used for this class. Objects are directly built from the database data and only stored in the unit of work, ''even if previously cached''.
  
Note: This option may affect performance because you are bypassing the session cache after an early transaction.
+
'''Note''': This option may affect performance because you are bypassing the session cache after an early transaction.
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r5c1-t35" headers="r1c1-t35" align="left" |
 
| id="r5c1-t35" headers="r1c1-t35" align="left" |
 
Always Isolating the Cache
 
Always Isolating the Cache
 
| headers="r5c1-t35 r1c2-t35" align="left" |
 
| headers="r5c1-t35 r1c2-t35" align="left" |
<tt>ISOLATE_CACHE_ALWAYS</tt>The session cache will ''never'' be used for the class. Objects are directly built from the database data and only stored in the unit of work. New objects and changes will never be merged into the session cache.
+
<tt>ISOLATE_CACHE_ALWAYS</tt>
  
Note: This option my affect performance because you are bypassing the session cache. However if this class is isolated or pessimistic locked and always accessed in a transaction, this can avoid having to build two copies of the object.
+
The session cache will ''never'' be used for the class. Objects are directly built from the database data and only stored in the unit of work. New objects and changes will never be merged into the session cache.
 +
 
 +
'''Note''': This option my affect performance because you are bypassing the session cache. However if this class is isolated or pessimistic locked and always accessed in a transaction, this can avoid having to build two copies of the object.
 
|}
 
|}
  
Line 2,030: Line 2,005:
  
 
Most of these options apply only to a unit of work in an early transaction, such as the following:
 
Most of these options apply only to a unit of work in an early transaction, such as the following:
 
 
* A unit of work that was flushed (<tt>write changes</tt>).
 
* A unit of work that was flushed (<tt>write changes</tt>).
 
* Issued a modify query.
 
* Issued a modify query.
Line 2,038: Line 2,012:
  
 
===How to Configure Unit of Work Cache Isolation at the Descriptor Level Using Java===
 
===How to Configure Unit of Work Cache Isolation at the Descriptor Level Using Java===
 +
To specify that a class is isolated, use a [[#Configuring Amendment Methods|descriptor amendment method]] to call <tt>ClassDescriptor</tt> method <tt>setUnitOfWorkCacheIsolationLevel</tt><nowiki>.</nowiki>
  
To specify that a class is isolated, use a descriptor amendment method (see [[#Configuring Amendment Methods]]) to call <tt>ClassDescriptor</tt> method <tt>setUnitOfWorkCacheIsolationLevel</tt><nowiki>.</nowiki>
 
  
==Configuring Cache Coordination Change Propagation at the Descriptor Level==
 
  
If you plan to use a coordinated cache (see [[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)|Cache Coordination]]), you can configure how, and under what conditions, a coordinated cache propagates changes for a given descriptor.
+
==Configuring Cache Coordination Change Propagation at the Descriptor Level==
 +
If you plan to use a [[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)#Cache Coordination|coordinated cache]], you can configure how, and under what conditions, a coordinated cache propagates changes for a given descriptor.
  
 
This table summarizes which descriptors support cache isolation configuration.
 
This table summarizes which descriptors support cache isolation configuration.
Line 2,049: Line 2,023:
  
 
<span id="Table 115-16"></span>
 
<span id="Table 115-16"></span>
''''' Descriptor Support for Cache Coordination Change Propagation Configuration'''''
 
 
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Cache Coordination Change Propagation Configuration" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support Cache Coordination Change Propagation Configuration" width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Cache Coordination Change Propagation Configuration" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support Cache Coordination Change Propagation Configuration" width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
Line 2,058: Line 2,030:
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r2c1-t36" headers="r1c1-t36" align="left" |
 
| id="r2c1-t36" headers="r1c1-t36" align="left" |
Relational Descriptors <sup>Foot 1 </sup>
+
Relational Descriptors <sup> 1 </sup>
 
| headers="r2c1-t36 r1c2-t36" align="left" |
 
| headers="r2c1-t36 r1c2-t36" align="left" |
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
Line 2,072: Line 2,044:
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r4c1-t36" headers="r1c1-t36" align="left" |
 
| id="r4c1-t36" headers="r1c1-t36" align="left" |
EIS Descriptors <sup>Foot 2 </sup>
+
EIS Descriptors <sup> 2 </sup>
 
| headers="r4c1-t36 r1c2-t36" align="left" |
 
| headers="r4c1-t36 r1c2-t36" align="left" |
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
Line 2,086: Line 2,058:
 
|}
 
|}
  
<br><sup>Footnote 1 </sup>Relational class descriptors only (see [[Creating%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)|Creating Relational Class Descriptors]]).<br><sup>Footnote 2 </sup>EIS root descriptors only (see [[Creating%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)|EIS Root Descriptors]]).<br>
+
<br><sup> 1 </sup>[[Creating%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#Creating Relational Class Descriptors|Relational Class Descriptors]] only.<br><sup> 2 </sup>[[Creating%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#EIS Root Descriptors|EIS Root Descriptors]] only.<br>
  
This configuration overrides the default cache coordination change propagation configuration defined at the project level (see [[Configuring%20a%20Project%20(ELUG)|Configuring Cache Coordination Change Propagation at the Project Level]]).
+
This configuration overrides the default cache coordination change propagation configuration defined at the project level (see [[Configuring%20a%20Project%20(ELUG)#Configuring Cache Coordination Change Propagation at the Project Level|Configuring Cache Coordination Change Propagation at the Project Level]]).
  
To complete your coordinated cache configuration, see [[Configuring%20a%20Coordinated%20Cache%20(ELUG)|Configuring a Coordinated Cache]].
+
To complete your coordinated cache configuration, see [[Configuring%20a%20Coordinated%20Cache%20(ELUG)#Configuring a Coordinated Cache|Configuring a Coordinated Cache]].
  
 
<br>
 
<br>
Line 2,096: Line 2,068:
 
{| class="Note oac_no_warn" width="80%" border="1" frame="hsides" rules="groups" cellpadding="3" frame="hsides" rules="groups"
 
{| class="Note oac_no_warn" width="80%" border="1" frame="hsides" rules="groups" cellpadding="3" frame="hsides" rules="groups"
 
| align="left" |
 
| align="left" |
'''Note:''' If you configure a descriptor as isolated (see [[#Configuring Cache Isolation at the Descriptor Level]]), it cannot participate in a coordinated cache.
+
'''Note:''' If you configure a descriptor as isolated (see [[#Configuring Cache Isolation at the Descriptor Level|Configuring Cache Isolation at the Descriptor Level]]), it cannot participate in a coordinated cache.
 
|}
 
|}
  
<br>
+
 
 +
 
  
 
===How to Configure Cache Coordination Change Propagation at the Descriptor Level Using Workbench===
 
===How to Configure Cache Coordination Change Propagation at the Descriptor Level Using Workbench===
 
 
To specify the coordinated cache change propagation options, use this procedure:
 
To specify the coordinated cache change propagation options, use this procedure:
 
 
# Select the descriptor in the '''Navigator'''.
 
# Select the descriptor in the '''Navigator'''.
 
# Select the '''Caching''' tab in the '''Editor'''. The Caching tab appears.<br><span id="Figure 115-27"></span>''''' Caching Tab, Coordination Options'''''<br>[[Image:descord.gif|Caching Tab, Coordination Options]]<br><br>
 
# Select the '''Caching''' tab in the '''Editor'''. The Caching tab appears.<br><span id="Figure 115-27"></span>''''' Caching Tab, Coordination Options'''''<br>[[Image:descord.gif|Caching Tab, Coordination Options]]<br><br>
Line 2,110: Line 2,081:
  
 
Use the following information to enter data in the '''Coordination''' field:
 
Use the following information to enter data in the '''Coordination''' field:
 
  
  
Line 2,148: Line 2,118:
 
: [[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)|Introduction to Cache]]
 
: [[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)|Introduction to Cache]]
  
===How to Configure Cache Coordination Change Propagation at the Descriptor Level Using Java===
 
  
Use a descriptor amendment method (see [[#Configuring Amendment Methods]]) to invoke <tt>ClassDescriptor</tt> method <tt>setCacheSynchronizationType</tt> passing in one of the following parameters:
 
  
 +
===How to Configure Cache Coordination Change Propagation at the Descriptor Level Using Java===
 +
Use a [[#Configuring Amendment Methods|descriptor amendment method]] to invoke <tt>ClassDescriptor</tt> method <tt>setCacheSynchronizationType</tt> passing in one of the following parameters:
 
* <tt>ClassDescriptor.DO_NOT_SEND_CHANGES</tt>
 
* <tt>ClassDescriptor.DO_NOT_SEND_CHANGES</tt>
 
* <tt>ClassDescriptor.SEND_OBJECT_CHANGES</tt>
 
* <tt>ClassDescriptor.SEND_OBJECT_CHANGES</tt>
Line 2,157: Line 2,127:
 
* <tt>ClassDescriptor.INVALIDATE_CHANGED_OBJECTS</tt>
 
* <tt>ClassDescriptor.INVALIDATE_CHANGED_OBJECTS</tt>
  
==Configuring Cache Expiration at the Descriptor Level==
 
  
 +
 +
 +
==Configuring Cache Expiration at the Descriptor Level==
 
By default, objects remain in the cache until they are explicitly deleted (see [[Using%20Basic%20Unit%20of%20Work%20API%20(ELUG)#Deleting Objects|Deleting Objects]]) or garbage-collected when using a weak identity map (see [[Configuring%20a%20Project%20(ELUG)#Configuring Cache Isolation at the Project Level|Configuring Cache Isolation at the Project Level]]). Alternatively, you can configure an object with a <tt>CacheInvalidationPolicy</tt> that allows you to specify, either automatically or manually, that an object is invalid: when any query attempts to read an invalid object, EclipseLink will go to the data source for the most up-to-date version of that object and update the cache with this information.
 
By default, objects remain in the cache until they are explicitly deleted (see [[Using%20Basic%20Unit%20of%20Work%20API%20(ELUG)#Deleting Objects|Deleting Objects]]) or garbage-collected when using a weak identity map (see [[Configuring%20a%20Project%20(ELUG)#Configuring Cache Isolation at the Project Level|Configuring Cache Isolation at the Project Level]]). Alternatively, you can configure an object with a <tt>CacheInvalidationPolicy</tt> that allows you to specify, either automatically or manually, that an object is invalid: when any query attempts to read an invalid object, EclipseLink will go to the data source for the most up-to-date version of that object and update the cache with this information.
  
Using cache invalidation ensures that your application does not use stale data. It provides a better performing alternative to always refreshing (see [[#Configuring Cache Refreshing]]).
+
Using cache invalidation ensures that your application does not use stale data. It provides a better performing alternative to always refreshing (see [[#Configuring Cache Refreshing|Configuring Cache Refreshing]]).
  
 
This table summarizes which descriptors support a cache invalidation policy.
 
This table summarizes which descriptors support a cache invalidation policy.
Line 2,167: Line 2,139:
  
 
<span id="Table 115-17"></span>
 
<span id="Table 115-17"></span>
''''' Descriptor Support for Cache Invalidation Policy'''''
 
 
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Cache Invalidation Policy" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support a cache invalidation policy." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Cache Invalidation Policy" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support a cache invalidation policy." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
Line 2,176: Line 2,146:
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r2c1-t39" headers="r1c1-t39" align="left" |
 
| id="r2c1-t39" headers="r1c1-t39" align="left" |
Relational Descriptors <sup>Foot 1 </sup>  
+
Relational Descriptors <sup> 1 </sup>  
 
| headers="r2c1-t39 r1c2-t39" align="left" |
 
| headers="r2c1-t39 r1c2-t39" align="left" |
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
Line 2,190: Line 2,160:
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r4c1-t39" headers="r1c1-t39" align="left" |
 
| id="r4c1-t39" headers="r1c1-t39" align="left" |
EIS Descriptors <sup>Foot 2 </sup>  
+
EIS Descriptors <sup> 2 </sup>  
 
| headers="r4c1-t39 r1c2-t39" align="left" |
 
| headers="r4c1-t39 r1c2-t39" align="left" |
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
Line 2,204: Line 2,174:
 
|}
 
|}
  
<br><sup>Footnote 1 </sup>Relational class descriptors only (see [[Creating%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)|Creating Relational Class Descriptors]]).<br><sup>Footnote 2 </sup>EIS root descriptors only (see [[Creating%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#EIS Root Descriptors|EIS Root Descriptors]]).<br>
+
<br><sup> 1 </sup>[[Creating%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#Creating Relational Class Descriptors|Relational Class Descriptors]] only.<br><sup> 2 </sup>[[Creating%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#EIS Root Descriptors|EIS Root Descriptors]] only.<br>
  
You can override the project-level cache invalidation configuration (see [[Configuring%20a%20Project%20(ELUG)|Configuring Cache Expiration at the Project Level]]) by defining cache invalidation at the descriptor or query level (see [[Using%20Advanced%20Query%20API%20(ELUG)#How to Configure Cache Expiration at the Query Level|How to Configure Cache Expiration at the Query Level]]).
+
You can override the project-level cache invalidation configuration (see [[Configuring%20a%20Project%20(ELUG)#Configuring Cache Expiration at the Project Level|Configuring Cache Expiration at the Project Level]]) by defining cache invalidation at the descriptor or query level (see [[Using%20Advanced%20Query%20API%20(ELUG)#How to Configure Cache Expiration at the Query Level|How to Configure Cache Expiration at the Query Level]]).
  
You can customize how EclipseLink communicates the fact that an object has been declared invalid to improve efficiency, if you are using a coordinated cache. For more information, see [[#Configuring Cache Coordination Change Propagation at the Descriptor Level]].
+
You can customize how EclipseLink communicates the fact that an object has been declared invalid to improve efficiency, if you are using a coordinated cache. For more information, see [[#Configuring Cache Coordination Change Propagation at the Descriptor Level|Configuring Cache Coordination Change Propagation at the Descriptor Level]].
  
 
For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)#Cache Invalidation|Cache Invalidation]].
 
For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)#Cache Invalidation|Cache Invalidation]].
Line 2,215: Line 2,185:
  
 
===How to Configure Cache Expiration at the Descriptor Level Using Workbench===
 
===How to Configure Cache Expiration at the Descriptor Level Using Workbench===
 
 
To specify the cache invalidation information for a descriptor, use this procedure:
 
To specify the cache invalidation information for a descriptor, use this procedure:
 
 
# Select the descriptor in the '''Navigator'''.
 
# Select the descriptor in the '''Navigator'''.
 
# Select the '''Caching''' tab in the '''Editor'''. The '''Caching''' tab appears.<br><span id="Figure 115-28"></span>''''' Caching Tab, Expiration Options'''''<br>[[Image:idcacexp.gif|Caching Tab, Expiration Options]]<br><br>
 
# Select the '''Caching''' tab in the '''Editor'''. The '''Caching''' tab appears.<br><span id="Figure 115-28"></span>''''' Caching Tab, Expiration Options'''''<br>[[Image:idcacexp.gif|Caching Tab, Expiration Options]]<br><br>
 
# Complete the Cache Expiry options on the tab.
 
# Complete the Cache Expiry options on the tab.
 +
  
 
Use this table to enter data in the following fields on the '''Caching''' tab to specify the cache invalidation policy for the descriptors.
 
Use this table to enter data in the following fields on the '''Caching''' tab to specify the cache invalidation policy for the descriptors.
 
 
  
 
{| class="HRuleInformal" dir="ltr" title="This table defines Cache Expiry options on the Caching tab" summary="This table defines Cache Expiry options on the Caching tab" width="100%" border="1" frame="hsides" rules="rows" cellpadding="3" frame="hsides" rules="rows"
 
{| class="HRuleInformal" dir="ltr" title="This table defines Cache Expiry options on the Caching tab" summary="This table defines Cache Expiry options on the Caching tab" width="100%" border="1" frame="hsides" rules="rows" cellpadding="3" frame="hsides" rules="rows"
Line 2,264: Line 2,231:
  
 
===How to Configure Cache Expiration at the Descriptor Level Using Java===
 
===How to Configure Cache Expiration at the Descriptor Level Using Java===
 
 
Use <tt>ClassDescriptor</tt> method <tt>setCacheInvalidationPolicy</tt> to set an appropriate instance of <tt>CacheInvalidationPolicy</tt>.
 
Use <tt>ClassDescriptor</tt> method <tt>setCacheInvalidationPolicy</tt> to set an appropriate instance of <tt>CacheInvalidationPolicy</tt>.
 +
 +
  
 
==Configuring Cache Existence Checking at the Descriptor Level==
 
==Configuring Cache Existence Checking at the Descriptor Level==
 
 
When EclipseLink writes an object to the database, EclipseLink runs an existence check to determine whether to perform an insert or an update.
 
When EclipseLink writes an object to the database, EclipseLink runs an existence check to determine whether to perform an insert or an update.
  
By default, EclipseLink checks against the cache. We recommend that you use this default existence check option for most applications. Checking the database for existence can cause a performance bottleneck in your application.
+
When using JPA, EclipseLink checks against the database by default.  When using the EclipseLink Native API it checks against the cache by default. We recommend that you use the default existence check option for most applications.
  
 
This table summarizes which descriptors support existence checking.
 
This table summarizes which descriptors support existence checking.
Line 2,277: Line 2,244:
  
 
<span id="Table 115-18"></span>
 
<span id="Table 115-18"></span>
''''' Descriptor Support for Existence Checking'''''
 
 
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Existence Checking" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support existence checking." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Existence Checking" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support existence checking." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
Line 2,286: Line 2,251:
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r2c1-t42" headers="r1c1-t42" align="left" |
 
| id="r2c1-t42" headers="r1c1-t42" align="left" |
Relational Descriptors <sup>Foot 1 </sup>
+
Relational Descriptors <sup> 1 </sup>
 
| headers="r2c1-t42 r1c2-t42" align="left" |
 
| headers="r2c1-t42 r1c2-t42" align="left" |
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
Line 2,300: Line 2,265:
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r4c1-t42" headers="r1c1-t42" align="left" |
 
| id="r4c1-t42" headers="r1c1-t42" align="left" |
EIS Descriptors <sup>Foot 2 </sup>
+
EIS Descriptors <sup> 2 </sup>
 
| headers="r4c1-t42 r1c2-t42" align="left" |
 
| headers="r4c1-t42 r1c2-t42" align="left" |
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported]]<br>
Line 2,314: Line 2,279:
 
|}
 
|}
  
<br><sup>Footnote 1 </sup>Relational class descriptors only (see [[Creating%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)|Creating Relational Class Descriptors]]).<br><sup>Footnote 2 </sup>EIS root descriptors only (see [[Creating%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)|EIS Root Descriptors]]).<br>
+
<br><sup> 1 </sup>[[Creating%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#Creating Relational Class Descriptors|Relational Class Descriptors]] only.<br><sup> 2 </sup>[[Creating%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#EIS Root Descriptors|EIS Root Descriptors]] only.<br>
  
You can configure existence checking at the descriptor level to override the project level configuration (see [[Configuring%20a%20Project%20(ELUG)|Configuring Existence Checking at the Project Level]]).
+
You can configure existence checking at the descriptor level to override the project level configuration (see [[Configuring%20a%20Project%20(ELUG)#Configuring Existence Checking at the Project Level|Configuring Existence Checking at the Project Level]]).
  
 
For more information see the following:
 
For more information see the following:
 
+
* [[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)#Cache Type and Object Identity|Cache Type and Object Identity]]
* [[Introduction%20to%20Cache%20(ELUG)|Cache Type and Object Identity]]
+
* [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Queries%20(ELUG)#Queries and the Cache|Queries and the Cache]]
* [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Queries%20(ELUG)|Queries and the Cache]]
+
* [[Using%20Advanced%20Unit%20of%20Work%20API%20(ELUG)#How to Use Registration and Existence Checking|How to Use Registration and Existence Checking]]
* [[Using%20Advanced%20Unit%20of%20Work%20API%20(ELUG)|How to Use Registration and Existence Checking]]
+
  
  
  
 
===How to Configure Cache Existence Checking at the Descriptor Level Using Workbench===
 
===How to Configure Cache Existence Checking at the Descriptor Level Using Workbench===
 
 
To specify the existence checking information for a descriptor, use this procedure:
 
To specify the existence checking information for a descriptor, use this procedure:
 
 
# Select the descriptor in the '''Navigator'''.
 
# Select the descriptor in the '''Navigator'''.
 
# Select the '''Caching''' tab in the '''Editor'''. The Caching tab appears.<br>'''''Caching Tab, Existence Checking Options'''''<br>[[Image:idexichk.gif|Caching Tab, Existence Checking Options]]<br><br>
 
# Select the '''Caching''' tab in the '''Editor'''. The Caching tab appears.<br>'''''Caching Tab, Existence Checking Options'''''<br>[[Image:idexichk.gif|Caching Tab, Existence Checking Options]]<br><br>
 
# Complete the '''Existence Checking''' options on the tab.
 
# Complete the '''Existence Checking''' options on the tab.
 +
  
 
Use this table to enter data in the following fields of the tab to specify the existence checking options for newly created descriptors:
 
Use this table to enter data in the following fields of the tab to specify the existence checking options for newly created descriptors:
 
 
  
 
{| class="HRuleInformal" dir="ltr" title="This table defines existence checking options on the Caching tab" summary="This table defines existence checking options on the Caching tab" width="100%" border="1" frame="hsides" rules="rows" cellpadding="3" frame="hsides" rules="rows"
 
{| class="HRuleInformal" dir="ltr" title="This table defines existence checking options on the Caching tab" summary="This table defines existence checking options on the Caching tab" width="100%" border="1" frame="hsides" rules="rows" cellpadding="3" frame="hsides" rules="rows"
Line 2,348: Line 2,309:
 
| id="r3c1-t43" headers="r1c1-t43" align="left" | '''Check Cache then Database'''
 
| id="r3c1-t43" headers="r1c1-t43" align="left" | '''Check Cache then Database'''
 
| headers="r3c1-t43 r1c2-t43" align="left" |
 
| headers="r3c1-t43 r1c2-t43" align="left" |
If an object is not in the cache, query the database to determine if the object exists. If the object exists, do an update. Otherwise, do an insert. Selecting this option may negatively impact performance. For more information, see [[Using%20Advanced%20Unit%20of%20Work%20API%20(ELUG)|Using Check Database]].
+
If an object is not in the cache, query the database to determine if the object exists. If the object exists, do an update. Otherwise, do an insert. Selecting this option may negatively impact performance. For more information, see [[Using%20Advanced%20Unit%20of%20Work%20API%20(ELUG)#Using Check Database|Using Check Database]].
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r4c1-t43" headers="r1c1-t43" align="left" | '''Assume Existence'''
 
| id="r4c1-t43" headers="r1c1-t43" align="left" | '''Assume Existence'''
 
| headers="r4c1-t43 r1c2-t43" align="left" |
 
| headers="r4c1-t43 r1c2-t43" align="left" |
Always assume objects exist: always do an update (never do an insert). For more information, see [[Using%20Advanced%20Unit%20of%20Work%20API%20(ELUG)|Using Assume Existence]].
+
Always assume objects exist: always do an update (never do an insert). For more information, see [[Using%20Advanced%20Unit%20of%20Work%20API%20(ELUG)#Using Assume Existence|Using Assume Existence]].
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r5c1-t43" headers="r1c1-t43" align="left" | '''Assume Non-Existence'''
 
| id="r5c1-t43" headers="r1c1-t43" align="left" | '''Assume Non-Existence'''
 
| headers="r5c1-t43 r1c2-t43" align="left" |
 
| headers="r5c1-t43 r1c2-t43" align="left" |
Always assume objects do not exist: always do an insert (never do an update). For more information, see [[Using%20Advanced%20Unit%20of%20Work%20API%20(ELUG)|Using Assume Nonexistence]].
+
Always assume objects do not exist: always do an insert (never do an update). For more information, see [[Using%20Advanced%20Unit%20of%20Work%20API%20(ELUG)#Using Assume Nonexistence|Using Assume Nonexistence]].
 
|}
 
|}
  
<br>
 
  
===How to Configure Cache Existence Checking at the Descriptor Level Using Java===
 
  
To configure existence checking at the descriptor level using Java, use <tt>ClassDescriptor</tt> method <tt>getQueryManager</tt> to acquire the <tt>DescriptorQueryManager</tt> from the descriptor and then use one of the following <tt>DescriptorQueryManager</tt> methods (see [[#Example 115-8|Configuring Existence Checking Using Java|Using Java]]):
 
  
* <tt>checkCacheForDoesExist</tt>–check the session cache. If the object is not in the cache, assume that the object does not exist (do an insert). If the object is in the cache, assume that the object exists (do an update). We recommend using this option for most applications.
+
===How to Configure Cache Existence Checking at the Descriptor Level Using Java===
* <tt>checkDatabaseForDoesExist</tt>–if an object is not in the cache, query the database to determine if the object exists. If the object exists, do an update. Otherwise, do an insert. Selecting this option may negatively impact performance. For more information, see [[Using%20Advanced%20Unit%20of%20Work%20API%20(ELUG)|Using Check Database]].
+
To configure existence checking at the descriptor level using Java, use <tt>ClassDescriptor</tt> method <tt>getQueryManager</tt> to acquire the <tt>DescriptorQueryManager</tt> from the descriptor and then use one of the following <tt>DescriptorQueryManager</tt> methods (see the [[#Example 115-8|Configuring Existence Checking Using Java]] example):
* <tt>assumeExistenceForDoesExist</tt>–always assume objects exist: always do an update (never do an insert). For more information, see [[Using%20Advanced%20Unit%20of%20Work%20API%20(ELUG)|Using Assume Existence]].
+
* <tt>checkCacheForDoesExist</tt> – check the session cache. If the object is not in the cache, assume that the object does not exist (do an insert). If the object is in the cache, assume that the object exists (do an update). We recommend using this option for most applications.
* <tt>assumeNonExistenceForDoesExist</tt>–always assume objects do not exist: always do an insert (never do an update). For more information, see [[Using%20Advanced%20Unit%20of%20Work%20API%20(ELUG)|Using Assume Nonexistence]].
+
* <tt>checkDatabaseForDoesExist</tt> – if an object is not in the cache, query the database to determine if the object exists. If the object exists, do an update. Otherwise, do an insert. Selecting this option may negatively impact performance. For more information, see [[Using%20Advanced%20Unit%20of%20Work%20API%20(ELUG)#Using Check Database|Using Check Database]].
 +
* <tt>assumeExistenceForDoesExist</tt> – always assume objects exist: always do an update (never do an insert). For more information, see [[Using%20Advanced%20Unit%20of%20Work%20API%20(ELUG)#Using Assume Existence|Using Assume Existence]].
 +
* <tt>assumeNonExistenceForDoesExist</tt> – always assume objects do not exist: always do an insert (never do an update). For more information, see [[Using%20Advanced%20Unit%20of%20Work%20API%20(ELUG)#Using Assume Nonexistence|Using Assume Nonexistence]].
  
  
Line 2,376: Line 2,336:
  
 
==Configuring Reading Subclasses on Queries==
 
==Configuring Reading Subclasses on Queries==
 
 
If you are mapping an inheritance hierarchy, by default, queries on root or branch classes return instances of the root class and their subclasses.
 
If you are mapping an inheritance hierarchy, by default, queries on root or branch classes return instances of the root class and their subclasses.
  
 
Alternatively, you can configure a root or branch class descriptor to do the following:
 
Alternatively, you can configure a root or branch class descriptor to do the following:
 
 
* not include subclasses when the root or branch class is queried;
 
* not include subclasses when the root or branch class is queried;
 
* outer-join subclasses when the root or branch class is queried.
 
* outer-join subclasses when the root or branch class is queried.
Line 2,392: Line 2,350:
  
 
<span id="Table 115-19"></span>
 
<span id="Table 115-19"></span>
''''' Descriptor Support for Inherited Attribute Mapping Configuration'''''
+
 
  
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Inherited Attribute Mapping Configuration" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support Inherited Attribute Mapping Configuration." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Inherited Attribute Mapping Configuration" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support Inherited Attribute Mapping Configuration." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
Line 2,431: Line 2,389:
 
<br>
 
<br>
  
For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)|Descriptors and Inheritance]].
+
For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)#Descriptors and Inheritance|Descriptors and Inheritance]].
  
  
  
 
===How to Configure Reading Subclasses on Queries Using Workbench===
 
===How to Configure Reading Subclasses on Queries Using Workbench===
 
 
To configure reading classes on subqueries, use this procedure:
 
To configure reading classes on subqueries, use this procedure:
 
 
# In the '''Navigator''', select a root or branch descriptor.If the '''Inheritance''' advanced property is not visible for the descriptor, right-click the descriptor and choose '''Select Advanced Properties''' > '''Inheritance''' from context menu or from the '''Selected''' menu.
 
# In the '''Navigator''', select a root or branch descriptor.If the '''Inheritance''' advanced property is not visible for the descriptor, right-click the descriptor and choose '''Select Advanced Properties''' > '''Inheritance''' from context menu or from the '''Selected''' menu.
 
# Click the '''Inheritance''' tab.<br>'''''Inheritance Tab, Read Subclasses on Query Option'''''<br>[[Image:inhrqury.gif|Inheritance Tab, Read Subclasses on Query Option]]<br><br>
 
# Click the '''Inheritance''' tab.<br>'''''Inheritance Tab, Read Subclasses on Query Option'''''<br>[[Image:inhrqury.gif|Inheritance Tab, Read Subclasses on Query Option]]<br><br>
Line 2,466: Line 2,422:
 
'''See Also'''
 
'''See Also'''
  
: [[#Configuring Reading Subclasses on Queries]]
+
: [[#Configuring Reading Subclasses on Queries|Configuring Reading Subclasses on Queries]]
  
  
  
 
===How to Configure Reading Subclasses on Queries Using Java===
 
===How to Configure Reading Subclasses on Queries Using Java===
 +
Create a [[#Configuring Amendment Methods|descriptor amendment method]] to customize the root or branch class descriptor's <tt>InheritancePolicy</tt>.
  
Create a descriptor amendment method ( [[#Configuring Amendment Methods]]) to customize the root or branch class descriptor's <tt>InheritancePolicy</tt>.
+
This example shows an amendment method for the <tt>Person</tt> class. In this example, you use the <tt>InheritancePolicy</tt> method <tt>dontReadSubclassesOnQueries</tt> to configure the descriptor so that subclasses are not read on queries.
 
+
[[#Example 115-9]] shows an amendment method for the <tt>Person</tt> class. In this example, you use the <tt>InheritancePolicy</tt> method <tt>dontReadSubclassesOnQueries</tt> to configure the descriptor so that subclasses are not read on queries.
+
  
  
Line 2,487: Line 2,442:
  
  
[[#Example 115-10]] shows an amendment method for the <tt>Person</tt> class. In this example, you use the <tt>InheritancePolicy</tt> method <tt>setReadAllSubclassesViewName</tt> to optimize multiple table inheritance queries.
+
This example shows an amendment method for the <tt>Person</tt> class. In this example, you use the <tt>InheritancePolicy</tt> method <tt>setReadAllSubclassesViewName</tt> to optimize multiple table inheritance queries.
  
  
Line 2,500: Line 2,455:
  
  
[[#Example 115-11]] shows an amendment method for the <tt>Person</tt> class. In this example, you use the <tt>InheritancePolicy</tt> method <tt>setShouldOuterJoinSubclasses</tt> to configure the descriptor so that subclasses are outer-joined on queries.
+
This example shows an amendment method for the <tt>Person</tt> class. In this example, you use the <tt>InheritancePolicy</tt> method <tt>setShouldOuterJoinSubclasses</tt> to configure the descriptor so that subclasses are outer-joined on queries.
  
  
Line 2,511: Line 2,466:
 
  ...
 
  ...
  
==Configuring Inheritance for a Child (Branch or Leaf) Class Descriptor==
 
  
 +
 +
==Configuring Inheritance for a Child (Branch or Leaf) Class Descriptor==
 
Inheritance describes how a derived (child) class inherits the characteristics of its superclass (parent). When you designate a class as a child, you must also specify the descriptor that represents the child's parent in your inheritance hierarchy.
 
Inheritance describes how a derived (child) class inherits the characteristics of its superclass (parent). When you designate a class as a child, you must also specify the descriptor that represents the child's parent in your inheritance hierarchy.
  
Line 2,519: Line 2,475:
  
 
<span id="Table 115-20"></span>
 
<span id="Table 115-20"></span>
''''' Descriptor Support for Child Inheritance Configuration'''''
 
  
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Child Inheritance Configuration" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support child inheritance configuration." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Child Inheritance Configuration" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support child inheritance configuration." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
Line 2,558: Line 2,513:
 
<br>
 
<br>
  
For more information about inheritance, see [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)|Descriptors and Inheritance]].
+
For more information about inheritance, see [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)#Descriptors and Inheritance|Descriptors and Inheritance]].
  
For more information about configuring inheritance for a parent (root) class descriptor, see [[#Configuring Inheritance for a Parent (Root) Descriptor]].
+
For more information about configuring inheritance for a parent (root) class descriptor, see [[#Configuring Inheritance for a Parent (Root) Descriptor|Configuring Inheritance for a Parent (Root) Descriptor]].
  
  
  
 
===How to Configure Inheritance for a Child (Branch or Leaf) Class Descriptor Using Workbench===
 
===How to Configure Inheritance for a Child (Branch or Leaf) Class Descriptor Using Workbench===
 
 
To create a child (branch or leaf class) for an inheritance, use this procedure.
 
To create a child (branch or leaf class) for an inheritance, use this procedure.
 
 
# In the '''Navigator''', select the descriptor you wish to specify as a child.
 
# In the '''Navigator''', select the descriptor you wish to specify as a child.
 
# Choose the '''Inheritance''' tab in the '''Property''' window.If the '''Inheritance''' tab is not visible, right-click the descriptor and choose '''Select Advanced Properties''' > '''Inheritance'''.
 
# Choose the '''Inheritance''' tab in the '''Property''' window.If the '''Inheritance''' tab is not visible, right-click the descriptor and choose '''Select Advanced Properties''' > '''Inheritance'''.
Line 2,587: Line 2,540:
 
| id="r3c1-t47" headers="r1c1-t47" align="left" | ''' Parent Descriptor'''
 
| id="r3c1-t47" headers="r1c1-t47" align="left" | ''' Parent Descriptor'''
 
| headers="r3c1-t47 r1c2-t47" align="left" |
 
| headers="r3c1-t47 r1c2-t47" align="left" |
Use the list to select the parent of this descriptor. See [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)|Descriptors and Inheritance]] for more information.
+
Use the list to select the parent of this descriptor. See [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)#Descriptors and Inheritance|Descriptors and Inheritance]] for more information.
 
|}
 
|}
  
<br>
+
 
  
 
'''See Also'''
 
'''See Also'''
: [[#Configuring Inheritance for a Child (Branch or Leaf) Class Descriptor]]
+
: [[#Configuring Inheritance for a Child (Branch or Leaf) Class Descriptor|Configuring Inheritance for a Child (Branch or Leaf) Class Descriptor]][[#Configuring Inheritance for a Child (Branch or Leaf) Class Descriptor|Configuring Inheritance for a Child (Branch or Leaf) Class Descriptor]]
: [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)|Descriptors and Inheritance]]
+
: [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)#Descriptors and Inheritance|Descriptors and Inheritance]]
  
===How to Configure Inheritance for a Child (Branch or Leaf) Class Descriptor Using Java===
 
  
 +
 +
===How to Configure Inheritance for a Child (Branch or Leaf) Class Descriptor Using Java===
 
Using Java, you can configure an inheritance child descriptor using <tt>InheritancePolicy</tt> method <tt>setParentClass</tt>, as this example shows.
 
Using Java, you can configure an inheritance child descriptor using <tt>InheritancePolicy</tt> method <tt>setParentClass</tt>, as this example shows.
  
Line 2,605: Line 2,559:
 
  descriptor.getInheritancePolicy().setParentClass(ChildClass.class);
 
  descriptor.getInheritancePolicy().setParentClass(ChildClass.class);
  
==Configuring Inheritance for a Parent (Root) Descriptor==
 
  
 +
 +
==Configuring Inheritance for a Parent (Root) Descriptor==
 
Inheritance describes how a derived (child) class inherits the characteristics of its superclass (parent). When you designate a class as a parent, you can configure how EclipseLink handles the class's inheritance hierarchy.
 
Inheritance describes how a derived (child) class inherits the characteristics of its superclass (parent). When you designate a class as a parent, you can configure how EclipseLink handles the class's inheritance hierarchy.
  
[[#Table 115-23]] summarizes which descriptors support parent inheritance configuration.
+
The following table summarizes which descriptors support parent inheritance configuration.
  
  
 
<span id="Table 115-21"></span>
 
<span id="Table 115-21"></span>
''''' Descriptor Support for Parent Inheritance Configuration'''''
 
  
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Parent Inheritance Configuration" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support Parent Inheritance Configuration" width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Parent Inheritance Configuration" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support Parent Inheritance Configuration" width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
Line 2,652: Line 2,606:
 
<br>
 
<br>
  
For more information about configuring inheritance for a child (branch or leaf) class descriptor, see [[#Configuring Inheritance for a Child (Branch or Leaf) Class Descriptor]].
+
For more information about configuring inheritance for a child (branch or leaf) class descriptor, see [[#Configuring Inheritance for a Child (Branch or Leaf) Class Descriptor|Configuring Inheritance for a Child (Branch or Leaf) Class Descriptor]].
  
For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)|Descriptors and Inheritance].
+
For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)#Descriptors and Inheritance|Descriptors and Inheritance]].
  
  
  
 
===How to Configure Inheritance for a Parent (Root) Descriptor Using Workbench===
 
===How to Configure Inheritance for a Parent (Root) Descriptor Using Workbench===
 
 
To create a root class for an inheritance, use this procedure.
 
To create a root class for an inheritance, use this procedure.
 
 
# In the '''Navigator''', select the descriptor you wish to specify as the root.
 
# In the '''Navigator''', select the descriptor you wish to specify as the root.
 
# Choose the '''Inheritance''' tab in the '''Property''' window.If the '''Inheritance''' tab is not visible, right-click the descriptor and choose '''Select Advanced Properties''' > '''Inheritance'''.
 
# Choose the '''Inheritance''' tab in the '''Property''' window.If the '''Inheritance''' tab is not visible, right-click the descriptor and choose '''Select Advanced Properties''' > '''Inheritance'''.
Line 2,685: Line 2,637:
 
| id="r4c1-t49" headers="r1c1-t49" align="left" | '''Use Class Indicator Field'''
 
| id="r4c1-t49" headers="r1c1-t49" align="left" | '''Use Class Indicator Field'''
 
| headers="r4c1-t49 r1c2-t49" align="left" |
 
| headers="r4c1-t49 r1c2-t49" align="left" |
Choose this option to specify a class indicator using a class indicator field. For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)|Using Class Indicator Fields]].
+
Choose this option to specify a class indicator using a class indicator field. For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)#Using Class Indicator Fields|Using Class Indicator Fields]].
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r5c1-t49" headers="r1c1-t49" align="left" | '''Field Selection'''
 
| id="r5c1-t49" headers="r1c1-t49" align="left" | '''Field Selection'''
Line 2,691: Line 2,643:
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r6c1-t49" headers="r1c1-t49" align="left" |
 
| id="r6c1-t49" headers="r1c1-t49" align="left" |
'''Use XML Schema "Type" Attribute'''<sup>Foot 1 </sup>
+
'''Use XML Schema "Type" Attribute'''<sup> 1 </sup>
 
| headers="r6c1-t49 r1c2-t49" align="left" | Select this option to use the type attribute specified in the XML schema for this descriptor's reference class.
 
| headers="r6c1-t49 r1c2-t49" align="left" | Select this option to use the type attribute specified in the XML schema for this descriptor's reference class.
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
Line 2,713: Line 2,665:
 
|}
 
|}
  
<br><sup>Footnote 1 </sup>EIS root (see [[Creating%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#EIS Root Descriptors|EIS Root Descriptors]]) or XML descriptors (see [[Introduction%20to%20XML%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)#XML Descriptor Concepts|XML Descriptor Concepts]]) only.<br>
+
<br><sup> 1 </sup>EIS root (see [[Creating%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#EIS Root Descriptors|EIS Root Descriptors]]) or XML descriptors (see [[Introduction%20to%20XML%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)#XML Descriptor Concepts|XML Descriptor Concepts]]) only.<br>
  
===How to Configure Inheritance for a Parent (Root) Descriptor Using Java===
 
  
Create a descriptor amendment method ( [[#Configuring Amendment Methods]]) to customize the root class descriptor's inheritance policy using <tt>InheritancePolicy</tt> methods <tt>setParentClass</tt>, <tt>setClassIndicatorFieldName</tt>, <tt>addClassIndicator</tt>, <tt>useClassNameAsIndicator</tt> and <tt>setClassExtractionMethodName</tt>, as required.
 
  
The following example shows amendment methods for the <tt>Person</tt> and <tt>Student</tt> classes where <tt>Student</tt> extends <tt>Person</tt> in a relational project. In this example, a class indicator field is used (see [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)|Using Class Indicator Fields]]).
+
===How to Configure Inheritance for a Parent (Root) Descriptor Using Java===
 +
Create a [[#Configuring Amendment Methods|descriptor amendment method]] to customize the root class descriptor's inheritance policy using <tt>InheritancePolicy</tt> methods <tt>setParentClass</tt>, <tt>setClassIndicatorFieldName</tt>, <tt>addClassIndicator</tt>, <tt>useClassNameAsIndicator</tt> and <tt>setClassExtractionMethodName</tt>, as required.
 +
 
 +
The following example shows amendment methods for the <tt>Person</tt> and <tt>Student</tt> classes where <tt>Student</tt> extends <tt>Person</tt> in a relational project. In this example, a class indicator field is used (see [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)#Using Class Indicator Fields|Using Class Indicator Fields]]).
  
  
Line 2,737: Line 2,690:
  
  
If you are using a class-extraction method (see [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)|Using Class Extraction Methods]]), you may also need to use <tt>InheritancePolicy</tt> methods <tt>setOnlyInstancesExpression</tt> and <tt>setWithAllSubclassesExpression</tt> (see [[#Configuring Inheritance Expressions for a Parent (Root) Class Descriptor]]).
+
If you are using a class-extraction method (see [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)#Using Class Extraction Methods|Using Class Extraction Methods]]), you may also need to use <tt>InheritancePolicy</tt> methods <tt>setOnlyInstancesExpression</tt> and <tt>setWithAllSubclassesExpression</tt> (see [[#Configuring Inheritance Expressions for a Parent (Root) Class Descriptor|Configuring Inheritance Expressions for a Parent (Root) Class Descriptor]]).
  
The following example shows amendment methods for the <tt>Person</tt> and <tt>Student</tt> classes where <tt>Student</tt> extends <tt>Person</tt> in an EIS project using XML records. In this example, a class indicator field is used (see [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)|Using Class Indicator Fields]]).
+
The following example shows amendment methods for the <tt>Person</tt> and <tt>Student</tt> classes where <tt>Student</tt> extends <tt>Person</tt> in an EIS project using XML records. In this example, a class indicator field is used (see [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)#Using Class Indicator Fields|Using Class Indicator Fields]]).
  
  
Line 2,756: Line 2,709:
 
  ...
 
  ...
  
==Configuring Inheritance Expressions for a Parent (Root) Class Descriptor==
 
  
If your class uses inheritance (see [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)|Descriptors and Inheritance]]) with a class extraction method (see [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)|Using Class Extraction Methods]]) you must provide EclipseLink with expressions to correctly filter sibling instances for all classes that share a common table.
+
==Configuring Inheritance Expressions for a Parent (Root) Class Descriptor==
 +
If your class uses inheritance (see [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)#Descriptors and Inheritance|Descriptors and Inheritance]]) with a class extraction method (see [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)#Using Class Extraction Methods|Using Class Extraction Methods]]) you must provide EclipseLink with expressions to correctly filter sibling instances for all classes that share a common table.
  
 
This table summarizes which descriptors support inheritance expression configuration.
 
This table summarizes which descriptors support inheritance expression configuration.
Line 2,764: Line 2,717:
  
 
<span id="Table 115-22"></span>
 
<span id="Table 115-22"></span>
''''' Descriptor Support for Inheritance Expression Configuration'''''
 
  
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Inheritance Expression Configuration" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support inheritance expression configuration." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Inheritance Expression Configuration" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support inheritance expression configuration." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
Line 2,801: Line 2,753:
 
|}
 
|}
  
<br>
 
  
[[#Figure 115-33|Example Inheritance Hierarchy]] shows a typical inheritance hierarchy. In this example, instances of both <tt>Person</tt> and <tt>Student</tt> are stored in the same <tt>PERSON</tt> table, as [[#Figure 115-34|PERSON Table]] shows: an instance of <tt>Person</tt> has a <tt>null</tt> value for <tt>STUDENT_NUMBER</tt>. Instances of <tt>Company</tt> are stored in a separate <tt>COMPANY</tt> table.
+
 
 +
The [[#Figure 115-33|Example Inheritance Hierarchy]] figure shows a typical inheritance hierarchy. In this example, instances of both <tt>Person</tt> and <tt>Student</tt> are stored in the same <tt>PERSON</tt> table, as the [[#Figure 115-34|PERSON Table]] figure shows: an instance of <tt>Person</tt> has a <tt>null</tt> value for <tt>STUDENT_NUMBER</tt>. Instances of <tt>Company</tt> are stored in a separate <tt>COMPANY</tt> table.
  
 
<br>
 
<br>
Line 2,823: Line 2,775:
 
Queries on a class that has its own table for its specific data, such as <tt>Company</tt>, and does not share this table with any sibling classes, do not require these expressions.
 
Queries on a class that has its own table for its specific data, such as <tt>Company</tt>, and does not share this table with any sibling classes, do not require these expressions.
  
If you use a class indicator type field (see [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)|Using Class Indicator Fields]]), EclipseLink automatically generates the required expressions.
+
If you use a class indicator type field (see [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)#Using Class Indicator Fields|Using Class Indicator Fields]]), EclipseLink automatically generates the required expressions.
  
If you use a class extraction method (see [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)|Using Class Extraction Methods]]), you must provide EclipseLink with an expressions to correctly filter sibling instances for all classes that share a common table.
+
If you use a class extraction method (see [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)#Using Class Extraction Methods|Using Class Extraction Methods]]), you must provide EclipseLink with an expressions to correctly filter sibling instances for all classes that share a common table.
  
 
For concrete classes, you must define an only- instances expression.
 
For concrete classes, you must define an only- instances expression.
Line 2,833: Line 2,785:
 
When EclipseLink queries for a leaf class, it uses the only- instances expression to filter out any sibling classes.
 
When EclipseLink queries for a leaf class, it uses the only- instances expression to filter out any sibling classes.
  
When EclipseLink queries for a root or branch class whose subclasses do not define their own tables, it uses the with-all-subclasses expression. This is also the case when a subclass view is used (see [[#Configuring Reading Subclasses on Queries]]).
+
When EclipseLink queries for a root or branch class whose subclasses do not define their own tables, it uses the with-all-subclasses expression. This is also the case when a subclass view is used (see [[#Configuring Reading Subclasses on Queries|Configuring Reading Subclasses on Queries]]).
  
 
When querying for a root or branch class that has subclasses that span multiple tables, a query is performed for each concrete class in the inheritance hierarchy using the only- instances expression to filter sibling classes.
 
When querying for a root or branch class that has subclasses that span multiple tables, a query is performed for each concrete class in the inheritance hierarchy using the only- instances expression to filter sibling classes.
  
When a class extraction method is used the only-instances expression is used to determine if a class is concrete. If a class does not require an only instances expression, do not enable reading subclasses on queries (see [[#Configuring Reading Subclasses on Queries]), otherwise EclipseLink will assume that the class has no instances and it will skip that class on queries.
+
When a class extraction method is used the only-instances expression is used to determine if a class is concrete. If a class does not require an only instances expression, do not enable reading subclasses on queries (see [[#Configuring Reading Subclasses on Queries|Configuring Reading Subclasses on Queries]]), otherwise EclipseLink will assume that the class has no instances and it will skip that class on queries.
  
For more information about inheritance expressions, see [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)|Specifying Expressions for Only-Instances and With-All-Subclasses]].
+
For more information about inheritance expressions, see [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)#Specifying Expressions for Only-Instances and With-All-Subclasses|Specifying Expressions for Only-Instances and With-All-Subclasses]].
  
  
  
 
===How to Configure Inheritance Expressions for a Parent (Root) Class Descriptor Using Java===
 
===How to Configure Inheritance Expressions for a Parent (Root) Class Descriptor Using Java===
 +
Create a [[#Configuring Amendment Methods|descriptor amendment method]] to customize the root class descriptor's <tt>InheritancePolicy</tt> using <tt>InheritancePolicy</tt> methods <tt>setOnlyInstancesExpression</tt> and <tt>setWithAllSubclassesExpression</tt>, as required.
  
Create a descriptor amendment method ( [[#Configuring Amendment Methods]]) to customize the root class descriptor's <tt>InheritancePolicy</tt> using <tt>InheritancePolicy</tt> methods <tt>setOnlyInstancesExpression</tt> and <tt>setWithAllSubclassesExpression</tt>, as required.
+
This example shows amendment methods for the <tt>Person</tt> and <tt>Student</tt> descriptors based on the class hierarchy shown in the  [[#Figure 115-33|Example Inheritance Hierarchy]] figure and the database table shown in the  [[#Figure 115-34|PERSON Table]] figure.
 
+
[[#Example 115-15|Configuring Only-Instances Expressions]] shows amendment methods for the <tt>Person</tt> and <tt>Student</tt> descriptors based on the class hierarchy shown in [[#Figure 115-33]] and the database table shown in [[#Figure 115-34]].
+
  
  
Line 2,870: Line 2,821:
  
  
[[#Example 115-16|Configuring Only-Instances and With-All-Subclasses Expressions]] shows amendment methods for the <tt>Bicycle</tt> and <tt>NonFueledVehicle</tt> descriptors based on the class hierarchy shown in [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)|Figure 14-1]] if the vehicle hierarchy stored all of the classes in a single vehicle table, and there was not a class indicator, but a class extraction method instead.
+
The [[#Example 115-16|Configuring Only-Instances and With-All-Subclasses Expressions]] example shows amendment methods for the <tt>Bicycle</tt> and <tt>NonFueledVehicle</tt> descriptors based on the class hierarchy shown in [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)|Figure 14-1]] if the vehicle hierarchy stored all of the classes in a single vehicle table, and there was not a class indicator, but a class extraction method instead.
  
  
Line 2,938: Line 2,889:
 
<br>
 
<br>
  
For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)|Descriptors and Inheritance]].
+
For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)#Descriptors and Inheritance|Descriptors and Inheritance]].
  
  
Line 2,957: Line 2,908:
 
==Configuring a Domain Object Method as an Event Handler==
 
==Configuring a Domain Object Method as an Event Handler==
  
You can associate a domain object method with any of the descriptor events shown in [[#Table 115-25|Descriptor Events]]. You can register any domain object method that complies with the following criteria:
+
You can associate a domain object method with any of the descriptor events shown in the [[#Table 115-25|Descriptor Events]] table. You can register any domain object method that complies with the following criteria:
 
+
 
* Is public.
 
* Is public.
 
* Returns void.
 
* Returns void.
Line 3,008: Line 2,958:
 
For example, you can add a method <tt>handlePostDelete</tt> (that is public, returns void, and takes a single parameter of type <tt>DescriptorEvent</tt>) to your <tt>Employee</tt> object to handle <tt>PostDeleteEvent</tt> descriptor events. After you register that method with the <tt>DescriptorEventManager</tt> owned by the <tt>Employee</tt> object's descriptor as the handler for <tt>PostDeleteEvent</tt> descriptor events, whenever the EclipseLink runtime performs a post-delete operation on an instance of the <tt>Employee</tt> object, the runtime dispatches a <tt>PostDeleteEvent</tt> to the <tt>handlePostDelete</tt> method on the instance of the <tt>Employee</tt> object associated with that <tt>PostDeleteEvent</tt>.
 
For example, you can add a method <tt>handlePostDelete</tt> (that is public, returns void, and takes a single parameter of type <tt>DescriptorEvent</tt>) to your <tt>Employee</tt> object to handle <tt>PostDeleteEvent</tt> descriptor events. After you register that method with the <tt>DescriptorEventManager</tt> owned by the <tt>Employee</tt> object's descriptor as the handler for <tt>PostDeleteEvent</tt> descriptor events, whenever the EclipseLink runtime performs a post-delete operation on an instance of the <tt>Employee</tt> object, the runtime dispatches a <tt>PostDeleteEvent</tt> to the <tt>handlePostDelete</tt> method on the instance of the <tt>Employee</tt> object associated with that <tt>PostDeleteEvent</tt>.
  
The '''Descriptor Event ID''' column in [[#Table 115-25|Descriptor Events]] lists the <tt>DescriptorEventManager</tt> field name used to identify a particular event. The <tt>DescriptorEvent</tt> method <tt>getEventCode</tt> returns this value. For example:
+
The '''Descriptor Event ID''' column in the [[#Table 115-25|Descriptor Events]] table lists the <tt>DescriptorEventManager</tt> field name used to identify a particular event. The <tt>DescriptorEvent</tt> method <tt>getEventCode</tt> returns this value. For example:
  
 
   
 
   
Line 3,209: Line 3,159:
 
===How to Configure a Domain Object Method as an Event Handler Using Java===
 
===How to Configure a Domain Object Method as an Event Handler Using Java===
  
[[#Example 115-17|Domain Object Method as a Descriptor Event Handler]] shows a domain object class with method <tt>handlePostDelete</tt> defined to handle <tt>PostDeleteEvent</tt> descriptor events. [[#Example 115-18|Registering a Domain Object Method as a Descriptor Event Handler]] shows how to register this method as the <tt>PostDeleteEvent</tt> event handler. Whenever the EclipseLink runtime performs a post-delete operation on an instance of <tt>Employee</tt>, the runtime will dispatch a <tt>PostDeleteEvent</tt> to the <tt>DescriptorEventManager</tt> owned by the <tt>Employee</tt> object's descriptor. The <tt>DescriptorEventManager</tt> will then invoke the <tt>handlePostDelete</tt> method on the instance of <tt>Employee</tt> associated with that <tt>PostDeleteEvent</tt>.
+
The [[#Example 115-17|Domain Object Method as a Descriptor Event Handler]] example shows a domain object class with method <tt>handlePostDelete</tt> defined to handle <tt>PostDeleteEvent</tt> descriptor events. The [[#Example 115-18|Registering a Domain Object Method as a Descriptor Event Handler]] example shows how to register this method as the <tt>PostDeleteEvent</tt> event handler. Whenever the EclipseLink runtime performs a post-delete operation on an instance of <tt>Employee</tt>, the runtime will dispatch a <tt>PostDeleteEvent</tt> to the <tt>DescriptorEventManager</tt> owned by the <tt>Employee</tt> object's descriptor. The <tt>DescriptorEventManager</tt> will then invoke the <tt>handlePostDelete</tt> method on the instance of <tt>Employee</tt> associated with that <tt>PostDeleteEvent</tt>.
  
  
Line 3,231: Line 3,181:
 
You can create your own <tt>DescriptorEventListner</tt> and register it with a <tt>DescriptorEventManager</tt> in a descriptor amendment method. You can also configure a <tt>DescriptorEventListner</tt> to be notified of events through the Java event model.
 
You can create your own <tt>DescriptorEventListner</tt> and register it with a <tt>DescriptorEventManager</tt> in a descriptor amendment method. You can also configure a <tt>DescriptorEventListner</tt> to be notified of events through the Java event model.
  
You can register any object that implements the <tt>DescriptorEventListener</tt> interface with the <tt>DescriptorEventManager</tt> owned by a domain object's descriptor to handle any descriptor event type (see [[#Table 115-27|Descriptor Events]]). To quickly implement this interface, you can extend abstract class <tt>DescriptorEventAdapter</tt> and override only the methods for the events you are interested in.
+
You can register any object that implements the <tt>DescriptorEventListener</tt> interface with the <tt>DescriptorEventManager</tt> owned by a domain object's descriptor to handle any descriptor event type (see the [[#Table 115-27|Descriptor Events]] table). To quickly implement this interface, you can extend abstract class <tt>DescriptorEventAdapter</tt> and override only the methods for the events you are interested in.
  
 
This table summarizes which descriptors support descriptor event listener configuration.
 
This table summarizes which descriptors support descriptor event listener configuration.
Line 3,278: Line 3,228:
 
For example, you create a <tt>DescriptorEventListener</tt> to handle <tt>PostBuildEvent</tt> descriptor events for <tt>Employee</tt> objects. After you register this <tt>DescriptorEventListener</tt> with the <tt>DescriptorEventManager</tt> owned by the <tt>Employee</tt> object's descriptor, whenever the EclipseLink runtime performs a post-build operation on an instance of <tt>Employee</tt>, the runtime dispatches a <tt>PostBuilEvent</tt> to the event listener's <tt>postBuild</tt> method.
 
For example, you create a <tt>DescriptorEventListener</tt> to handle <tt>PostBuildEvent</tt> descriptor events for <tt>Employee</tt> objects. After you register this <tt>DescriptorEventListener</tt> with the <tt>DescriptorEventManager</tt> owned by the <tt>Employee</tt> object's descriptor, whenever the EclipseLink runtime performs a post-build operation on an instance of <tt>Employee</tt>, the runtime dispatches a <tt>PostBuilEvent</tt> to the event listener's <tt>postBuild</tt> method.
  
[[#Table 115-27|Descriptor Events]] lists the <tt>DescriptorEventListener</tt> methods associated with each descriptor event. The '''Descriptor Event Listener Method''' column lists the <tt>DescriptorEventListener</tt> methods associated with each <tt>DescriptorEvent</tt>.
+
The [[#Table 115-27|Descriptor Events]] table lists the <tt>DescriptorEventListener</tt> methods associated with each descriptor event. The '''Descriptor Event Listener Method''' column lists the <tt>DescriptorEventListener</tt> methods associated with each <tt>DescriptorEvent</tt>.
  
  
Line 3,397: Line 3,347:
  
 
===How to Configure a Descriptor Event Listener as an Event Handler Using Java===
 
===How to Configure a Descriptor Event Listener as an Event Handler Using Java===
 
+
The [[#Example 115-19|DescriptorEventListener]] example shows a <tt>DescriptorEventListener</tt> that handles <tt>PostBuildEvent</tt> descriptor events. The [[#Example 115-20|Registering a DescriptorEventListener with the DescriptorEventManager]] example shows how to register this <tt>DescriptorEventListener</tt> with the <tt>Employee</tt> object's descriptor. Whenever the EclipseLink runtime performs a post-build operation on an instance of <tt>Employee</tt>, the runtime will dispatch a post build event to the corresponding <tt>DescriptorEventListener</tt> method on each registered event listener (in this case, it calls the <tt>postBuild</tt> method).
[[#Example 115-19|DescriptorEventListener]] shows a <tt>DescriptorEventListener</tt> that handles <tt>PostBuildEvent</tt> descriptor events. [[#Example 115-20|Registering a DescriptorEventListener with the DescriptorEventManager]] shows how to register this <tt>DescriptorEventListener</tt> with the <tt>Employee</tt> object's descriptor. Whenever the EclipseLink runtime performs a post-build operation on an instance of <tt>Employee</tt>, the runtime will dispatch a post build event to the corresponding <tt>DescriptorEventListener</tt> method on each registered event listener (in this case, it calls the <tt>postBuild</tt> method).
+
  
  
Line 3,435: Line 3,384:
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r2c1-t57" headers="r1c1-t57" align="left" |
 
| id="r2c1-t57" headers="r1c1-t57" align="left" |
Relational Descriptors<sup>Foot 1 </sup>
+
Relational Descriptors<sup> 1 </sup>
 
| headers="r2c1-t57 r1c2-t57" align="left" |
 
| headers="r2c1-t57 r1c2-t57" align="left" |
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported.]]<br>
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported.]]<br>
Line 3,461: Line 3,410:
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r4c1-t57" headers="r1c1-t57" align="left" |
 
| id="r4c1-t57" headers="r1c1-t57" align="left" |
EIS Descriptors <sup> Foot 2 </sup>
+
EIS Descriptors <sup> 2 </sup>
 
| headers="r4c1-t57 r1c2-t57" align="left" |
 
| headers="r4c1-t57 r1c2-t57" align="left" |
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported.]]<br>
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported.]]<br>
Line 3,487: Line 3,436:
 
|}
 
|}
  
<br><sup>Footnote 1 </sup>Relational class descriptors only (see [[Creating%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#Creating Relational Class Descriptors|Creating Relational Class Descriptors]]).<br><sup>Footnote 2 </sup>EIS root descriptors only (see [[Creating%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#EIS Root Descriptors|EIS Root Descriptors]]).<br>
+
<br><sup> 1 </sup>[[Creating%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#Creating Relational Class Descriptors|Relational Class Descriptors]] only.<br><sup> 2 </sup>[[Creating%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#EIS Root Descriptors|EIS Root Descriptors]] only.<br>
  
 
We recommend that you use a locking policy. You should use a locking policy in any multiuser environment to prevent one user writing over another user's changes. Although locking can be particularly important if multiple servers or multiple applications access the same data, even in a single server application, the same locking issue still exists. In a multiple-server environment, locking is still relevant even if your application uses cache refreshing or cache coordination.
 
We recommend that you use a locking policy. You should use a locking policy in any multiuser environment to prevent one user writing over another user's changes. Although locking can be particularly important if multiple servers or multiple applications access the same data, even in a single server application, the same locking issue still exists. In a multiple-server environment, locking is still relevant even if your application uses cache refreshing or cache coordination.
Line 3,531: Line 3,480:
 
| id="r8c1-t58" headers="r1c1-t58" align="left" | '''Store Version in Cache'''
 
| id="r8c1-t58" headers="r1c1-t58" align="left" | '''Store Version in Cache'''
 
| headers="r8c1-t58 r1c2-t58" align="left" |
 
| headers="r8c1-t58 r1c2-t58" align="left" |
Specify whether or not you want to store the version information in the cache. If you choose not to define a mapping for the version field, then you must enable this option to configure the descriptor to store the version value in the EclipseLink cache.If you choose to define a mapping for the version field, then you must disable this option in order to store the version value in the object.For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)#Optimistic Locking in a Three-Tier Application|Optimistic Locking in a Three-Tier Application]].
+
Specify whether or not you want to store the version information in the cache. If you choose not to define a mapping for the version field, then you must enable this option to configure the descriptor to store the version value in the EclipseLink cache.
 +
 
 +
If you choose to define a mapping for the version field, then you must disable this option in order to store the version value in the object.<br>For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)#Optimistic Locking in a Three-Tier Application|Optimistic Locking in a Three-Tier Application]].
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r9c1-t58" headers="r1c1-t58" align="left" |
 
| id="r9c1-t58" headers="r1c1-t58" align="left" |
''' By Fields''' <sup>Foot 1 </sup>
+
''' By Fields''' <sup> 1 </sup>
 
| headers="r9c1-t58 r1c2-t58" align="left" |
 
| headers="r9c1-t58 r1c2-t58" align="left" |
 
Specify to use optimistic locking, based on database fields. These fields appear for relational descriptors only.
 
Specify to use optimistic locking, based on database fields. These fields appear for relational descriptors only.
Line 3,556: Line 3,507:
 
|}
 
|}
  
<br><sup>Footnote 1 </sup> You cannot use field locking with the <tt>AttributeChangeTrackingPolicy</tt> (see [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Transactions (ELUG)#Attribute Change Tracking Policy|Attribute Change Tracking Policy]]).<br>
+
<br><sup> 1 </sup> You cannot use field locking with the <tt>AttributeChangeTrackingPolicy</tt> (see [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Transactions (ELUG)#Attribute Change Tracking Policy|Attribute Change Tracking Policy]]).<br>
  
 
===How to Configure Locking Policy Using Java===
 
===How to Configure Locking Policy Using Java===
Line 3,628: Line 3,579:
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r4c1-t59" headers="r1c1-t59" align="left" |
 
| id="r4c1-t59" headers="r1c1-t59" align="left" |
EIS Descriptors<sup>Foot 1 </sup>
+
EIS Descriptors<sup> 1 </sup>
 
| headers="r4c1-t59 r1c2-t59" align="left" |
 
| headers="r4c1-t59 r1c2-t59" align="left" |
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported.]]<br>
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported.]]<br>
Line 3,642: Line 3,593:
 
|}
 
|}
  
<br><sup>Footnote 1 </sup>EIS root descriptors only (see [[Creating%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#EIS Root Descriptors|EIS Root Descriptors]]).<br>
+
<br><sup> 1 </sup>[[Creating%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#EIS Root Descriptors|EIS Root Descriptors]] only.<br>
  
  
Line 3,832: Line 3,783:
 
===How to Configure Instantiation Policy Using Java===
 
===How to Configure Instantiation Policy Using Java===
 
Use one of the following <tt>ClassDescriptor</tt> methods to set the appropriate type of instantiation policy:
 
Use one of the following <tt>ClassDescriptor</tt> methods to set the appropriate type of instantiation policy:
 
 
* <tt>useDefaultConstructorInstantiationPolicy</tt>
 
* <tt>useDefaultConstructorInstantiationPolicy</tt>
 
* <tt>useMethodInstantiationPolicy</tt>
 
* <tt>useMethodInstantiationPolicy</tt>
 
* <tt>useFactoryInstantiationPolicy</tt>
 
* <tt>useFactoryInstantiationPolicy</tt>
  
==Configuring Copy Policy==
 
  
 +
 +
==Configuring Copy Policy==
 
The EclipseLink unit of work feature must be able to produce an exact copy (clone) persistent objects. This table summarizes which descriptors support a copy policy.
 
The EclipseLink unit of work feature must be able to produce an exact copy (clone) persistent objects. This table summarizes which descriptors support a copy policy.
  
  
 
<span id="Table 115-32"></span>
 
<span id="Table 115-32"></span>
''''' Configuring Descriptors with a Copy Policy'''''
 
  
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Configuring Descriptors with a Copy Policy" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support copy policy." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Configuring Descriptors with a Copy Policy" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support copy policy." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
! id="r1c1-t65" align="left" valign="bottom" | '''Descriptor'''
 
! id="r1c1-t65" align="left" valign="bottom" | '''Descriptor'''
! id="r1c2-t65" align="left" valign="bottom" | '''[[#How to Configure Copy Policy Using Workbench|Using Workbench]]<br>'''
+
! id="r1c2-t65" align="left" valign="bottom" | '''[[#How to Configure Copy Policy Using Workbench|Using the Workbench]]<br>'''
 
! id="r1c3-t65" align="left" valign="bottom" | '''[[#How to Configure Copy Policy Using Java|Using Java]]<br>'''
 
! id="r1c3-t65" align="left" valign="bottom" | '''[[#How to Configure Copy Policy Using Java|Using Java]]<br>'''
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
Line 3,883: Line 3,833:
  
 
EclipseLink supports the following two ways of copying objects:
 
EclipseLink supports the following two ways of copying objects:
 
 
* Instantiation policy: By default, EclipseLink creates a new copy of an object by using the currently configured instantiation policy (see [[#Configuring Instantiation Policy|Configuring Instantiation Policy]]).
 
* Instantiation policy: By default, EclipseLink creates a new copy of an object by using the currently configured instantiation policy (see [[#Configuring Instantiation Policy|Configuring Instantiation Policy]]).
 
* Method: EclipseLink creates a new copy of an object by calling a method on the object that you specify. For example, you can specify the object's <tt>clone</tt> method (or any other appropriate method on the object). Note that the clone method should return a shallow clone of the object.
 
* Method: EclipseLink creates a new copy of an object by calling a method on the object that you specify. For example, you can specify the object's <tt>clone</tt> method (or any other appropriate method on the object). Note that the clone method should return a shallow clone of the object.
Line 3,890: Line 3,839:
  
 
===How to Configure Copy Policy Using Workbench===
 
===How to Configure Copy Policy Using Workbench===
 
 
To specify the copy policy for a descriptor, use this procedure:
 
To specify the copy policy for a descriptor, use this procedure:
 
 
# Select a descriptor in the '''Navigator'''. Its properties appear in the Editor.If the '''Copying''' advanced property is not visible for the descriptor, right-click the descriptor and choose '''Select Advanced Properties''' > '''Copying''' from the context menu or from the '''Selected''' menu.
 
# Select a descriptor in the '''Navigator'''. Its properties appear in the Editor.If the '''Copying''' advanced property is not visible for the descriptor, right-click the descriptor and choose '''Select Advanced Properties''' > '''Copying''' from the context menu or from the '''Selected''' menu.
 
# Click the '''Copying''' tab in the '''Editor'''.<br>''''' Copying Tab'''''<br>[[Image:copying.gif|Copying Tab]]<br><br>
 
# Click the '''Copying''' tab in the '''Editor'''.<br>''''' Copying Tab'''''<br>[[Image:copying.gif|Copying Tab]]<br><br>
Line 3,905: Line 3,852:
 
| id="r2c1-t66" headers="r1c1-t66" align="left" | '''Use Instantiation Policy'''
 
| id="r2c1-t66" headers="r1c1-t66" align="left" | '''Use Instantiation Policy'''
 
| headers="r2c1-t66 r1c2-t66" align="left" |
 
| headers="r2c1-t66 r1c2-t66" align="left" |
Creates a new instance of the object using the descriptor's instantiation policy (see [[#Configuring Instantiation Policy|Configuring Instantiation Policy]).
+
Creates a new instance of the object using the descriptor's instantiation policy (see [[#Configuring Instantiation Policy|Configuring Instantiation Policy]]).
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r3c1-t66" headers="r1c1-t66" align="left" | '''Use Clone Method'''
 
| id="r3c1-t66" headers="r1c1-t66" align="left" | '''Use Clone Method'''
Line 3,911: Line 3,858:
 
|}
 
|}
  
===How to Configure Copy Policy Using Java===
 
  
Use one of the following <tt>ClassDescriptor</tt> methods to set the appropriate type of copy policy:
 
  
 +
===How to Configure Copy Policy Using Java===
 +
Use one of the following <tt>ClassDescriptor</tt> methods to set the appropriate type of copy policy:
 
* <tt>useCloneCopyPolicy()</tt><nowiki>: the object must provide a </nowiki><tt>clone</tt> method
 
* <tt>useCloneCopyPolicy()</tt><nowiki>: the object must provide a </nowiki><tt>clone</tt> method
 
* <tt>useCloneCopyPolicy(java.lang.String cloneMethodName)</tt>
 
* <tt>useCloneCopyPolicy(java.lang.String cloneMethodName)</tt>
 
* <tt>useInstantiationCopyPolicy()</tt>
 
* <tt>useInstantiationCopyPolicy()</tt>
  
==Configuring Change Policy==
 
  
 +
 +
==Configuring Change Policy==
 
Use a change policy to specify how EclipseLink should track changes made to objects after you register them with a unit of work. This table summarizes which descriptors support a change policy.
 
Use a change policy to specify how EclipseLink should track changes made to objects after you register them with a unit of work. This table summarizes which descriptors support a change policy.
  
  
 
<span id="Table 115-33"></span>
 
<span id="Table 115-33"></span>
''''' Descriptor Support for Change Policy'''''
 
  
 
{| class="RuleFormalWideMax" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Change Policy" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support for change policy." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
{| class="RuleFormalWideMax" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Change Policy" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support for change policy." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
Line 3,933: Line 3,880:
 
! id="r1c3-t67" align="left" valign="bottom" | '''[[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Transactions (ELUG)#Object-Level Change Tracking Policy|Object-Level Change Tracking Policy]]<br>'''
 
! id="r1c3-t67" align="left" valign="bottom" | '''[[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Transactions (ELUG)#Object-Level Change Tracking Policy|Object-Level Change Tracking Policy]]<br>'''
 
! id="r1c4-t67" align="left" valign="bottom" | '''[[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Transactions (ELUG)#Attribute Change Tracking Policy|Attribute Change Tracking Policy]]<br>'''
 
! id="r1c4-t67" align="left" valign="bottom" | '''[[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Transactions (ELUG)#Attribute Change Tracking Policy|Attribute Change Tracking Policy]]<br>'''
! id="r1c5-t67" align="left" valign="bottom" | '''Using Workbench'''
+
! id="r1c5-t67" align="left" valign="bottom" | '''Using the Workbench'''
 
! id="r1c6-t67" align="left" valign="bottom" | '''[[#How to Configure Change Policy Using Java|Using Java]]<br>'''
 
! id="r1c6-t67" align="left" valign="bottom" | '''[[#How to Configure Change Policy Using Java|Using Java]]<br>'''
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r2c1-t67" headers="r1c1-t67" align="left" |
 
| id="r2c1-t67" headers="r1c1-t67" align="left" |
Relational Descriptors<sup>Foot 1 </sup>
+
Relational Descriptors<sup> 1 </sup>
 
| headers="r2c1-t67 r1c2-t67" align="left" |
 
| headers="r2c1-t67 r1c2-t67" align="left" |
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported.]]<br>
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported.]]<br>
Line 3,963: Line 3,910:
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
| id="r4c1-t67" headers="r1c1-t67" align="left" |
 
| id="r4c1-t67" headers="r1c1-t67" align="left" |
EIS Descriptors <sup>Foot 2 </sup>
+
EIS Descriptors <sup> 2 </sup>
 
| headers="r4c1-t67 r1c2-t67" align="left" |
 
| headers="r4c1-t67 r1c2-t67" align="left" |
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported.]]<br>
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported.]]<br>
Line 3,989: Line 3,936:
 
|}
 
|}
  
<br><sup>Footnote 1 </sup>Relational class descriptors only (see [[Creating%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#Creating Relational Class Descriptors|Creating Relational Class Descriptors]]).<br><sup>Footnote 2 </sup>EIS root descriptors only (see [[Creating%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#EIS Root Descriptors|EIS Root Descriptors]]).<br>
+
<br><sup> 1 </sup>[[Creating%20a%20Relational%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#Creating Relational Class Descriptors|Relational Class Descriptors]] only.<br><sup> 2 </sup>[[Creating%20an%20EIS%20Descriptor%20(ELUG)#EIS Root Descriptors|EIS Root Descriptors]] only.<br>
  
 
By default, EclipseLink uses the deferred change detection policy.
 
By default, EclipseLink uses the deferred change detection policy.
Line 4,004: Line 3,951:
  
 
For more information, see the following:
 
For more information, see the following:
 
 
* [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Transactions (ELUG)#Unit of Work and Change Policy|Unit of Work and Change Policy]]
 
* [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Transactions (ELUG)#Unit of Work and Change Policy|Unit of Work and Change Policy]]
 
* [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Transactions (ELUG)#Change Policy Mapping Support|Change Policy Mapping Support]]
 
* [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Transactions (ELUG)#Change Policy Mapping Support|Change Policy Mapping Support]]
Line 4,015: Line 3,961:
  
 
===How to Configure Change Policy Using Java===
 
===How to Configure Change Policy Using Java===
 
 
This section describes how to configure a descriptor with a change policy using Java, and how to implement persistent classes for those change policies that are intrusive. It includes information on configuring the following:
 
This section describes how to configure a descriptor with a change policy using Java, and how to implement persistent classes for those change policies that are intrusive. It includes information on configuring the following:
 
 
* [[#Configuring Deferred Change Detection Policy|Configuring Deferred Change Detection Policy]]
 
* [[#Configuring Deferred Change Detection Policy|Configuring Deferred Change Detection Policy]]
 
* [[#Configuring Object Change Tracking Policy|Configuring Object Change Tracking Policy]]
 
* [[#Configuring Object Change Tracking Policy|Configuring Object Change Tracking Policy]]
Line 4,025: Line 3,969:
  
 
====Configuring Deferred Change Detection Policy====
 
====Configuring Deferred Change Detection Policy====
 
 
The <tt>DeferredChangeDetectionPolicy</tt> provides good unit of work commit performance for a wide range of object change characteristics. It is the default change policy. For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Transactions (ELUG)#Deferred Change Detection Policy|Deferred Change Detection Policy]]).
 
The <tt>DeferredChangeDetectionPolicy</tt> provides good unit of work commit performance for a wide range of object change characteristics. It is the default change policy. For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Transactions (ELUG)#Deferred Change Detection Policy|Deferred Change Detection Policy]]).
  
 
Because it is the default, you do not need to explicitly configure this policy.
 
Because it is the default, you do not need to explicitly configure this policy.
  
To configure EclipseLink to use a <tt>DeferredChangeDetectionPolicy</tt>, create a descriptor amendment method (see [[#Configuring Amendment Methods|Configuring Amendment Methods]]) that sets the change policy, as [[#Example 115-21|Setting the ObjectChangeTrackingPolicy]] illustrates.
+
To configure EclipseLink to use a <tt>DeferredChangeDetectionPolicy</tt>, create a descriptor amendment method (see [[#Configuring Amendment Methods|Configuring Amendment Methods]]) that sets the change policy, as the [[#Example 115-21|Setting the ObjectChangeTrackingPolicy]] example illustrates.
 +
 
 +
 
  
 
====Configuring Object Change Tracking Policy====
 
====Configuring Object Change Tracking Policy====
 
The <tt>ObjectChangeTrackingPolicy</tt> provides improved unit of work commit performance for objects with few attributes, or with many attributes and many changed attributes. For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Transactions (ELUG)#Object-Level Change Tracking Policy|Object-Level Change Tracking Policy]].
 
The <tt>ObjectChangeTrackingPolicy</tt> provides improved unit of work commit performance for objects with few attributes, or with many attributes and many changed attributes. For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Transactions (ELUG)#Object-Level Change Tracking Policy|Object-Level Change Tracking Policy]].
  
For JPA applications deployed to an application server, for which EclipseLink provides integration (see [[Integrating%20EclipseLink%20with%20an%20Application%20Server (ELUG)#Introduction to the Application Server Support|Introduction to the Application Server Support]]), when you configure an entity’s descriptor with an <tt>ObjectLevelChangeTrackingPolicy</tt>, EclipseLink automatically generates code of a concrete subclass to implement the EclipseLink <tt>ChangeTracker</tt> interface at deploy time. Configuring the <tt>ObjectLevelChangeTrackingPolicy</tt> prevents EclipseLink from automatically applying an <tt>AttributeChangeTrackingPolicy</tt> (see [[#Configuring Attribute Change Tracking Policy]]).
+
For JPA applications deployed to an application server, for which EclipseLink provides integration (see [[Integrating%20EclipseLink%20with%20an%20Application%20Server (ELUG)#Introduction to the Application Server Support|Introduction to the Application Server Support]]), when you configure an entity’s descriptor with an <tt>ObjectLevelChangeTrackingPolicy</tt>, EclipseLink automatically generates code of a concrete subclass to implement the EclipseLink <tt>ChangeTracker</tt> interface at deploy time. Configuring the <tt>ObjectLevelChangeTrackingPolicy</tt> prevents EclipseLink from automatically applying an <tt>AttributeChangeTrackingPolicy</tt> (see [[#Configuring Attribute Change Tracking Policy|Configuring Attribute Change Tracking Policy]]).
  
 
To configure EclipseLink to use an <tt>ObjectChangeTrackingPolicy</tt>, use this procedure:
 
To configure EclipseLink to use an <tt>ObjectChangeTrackingPolicy</tt>, use this procedure:
Line 4,083: Line 4,028:
 
</ol>
 
</ol>
  
====Configuring Attribute Change Tracking Policy====
 
  
 +
 +
====Configuring Attribute Change Tracking Policy====
 
The <tt>AttributeChangeTrackingPolicy</tt> provides improved unit of work commit performance for objects with many attributes and few changed attributes. In general, this is the most efficient change policy. It is the default change policy for JPA applications. For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Transactions (ELUG)#Attribute Change Tracking Policy|Attribute Change Tracking Policy]]).
 
The <tt>AttributeChangeTrackingPolicy</tt> provides improved unit of work commit performance for objects with many attributes and few changed attributes. In general, this is the most efficient change policy. It is the default change policy for JPA applications. For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Transactions (ELUG)#Attribute Change Tracking Policy|Attribute Change Tracking Policy]]).
  
<br>
 
  
 
{| class="Note oac_no_warn" width="80%" border="1" frame="hsides" rules="groups" cellpadding="3" frame="hsides" rules="groups"
 
{| class="Note oac_no_warn" width="80%" border="1" frame="hsides" rules="groups" cellpadding="3" frame="hsides" rules="groups"
Line 4,094: Line 4,039:
 
|}
 
|}
  
<br>
 
  
When you deploy a EclipseLink-enabled JPA application, EclipseLink automatically configures your persistent classes to use the <tt>AttributeChangeTrackingPolicy</tt> and, using bytecode weaving, configures your persistence classes to implement the EclipseLink <tt>ChangeTracker</tt> interface. In this case, you do not need to explicitly configure this change policy.
+
When you deploy an EclipseLink-enabled JPA application, EclipseLink automatically configures your persistent classes to use the <tt>AttributeChangeTrackingPolicy</tt> and, using bytecode weaving, configures your persistence classes to implement the EclipseLink <tt>ChangeTracker</tt> interface. In this case, you do not need to explicitly configure this change policy.
  
 
To configure EclipseLink to use an <tt>AttributeChangeTrackingPolicy</tt> for plain Java objects or other application servers, use this procedure:
 
To configure EclipseLink to use an <tt>AttributeChangeTrackingPolicy</tt> for plain Java objects or other application servers, use this procedure:
Line 4,119: Line 4,063:
 
     String firstName;
 
     String firstName;
 
   
 
   
     public PropertyChangeListener getTopLinkPropertyChangeListener() {
+
     public PropertyChangeListener getEclipseLink PropertyChangeListener() {
 
       return this.listener;
 
       return this.listener;
 
     }
 
     }
 
   
 
   
     public void setTopLinkPropertyChangeListener(PropertyChangeListener listener) {
+
     public void setEclipseLinkPropertyChangeListener(PropertyChangeListener listener) {
 
       this.listener = listener;
 
       this.listener = listener;
 
     }
 
     }
Line 4,144: Line 4,088:
 
</li>
 
</li>
 
</ol>
 
</ol>
 +
 +
  
 
==Configuring a History Policy==
 
==Configuring a History Policy==
 
+
If you want to use historical sessions (see [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Sessions%20(ELUG)#Historical Sessions|Historical Sessions]]) to execute historical queries (see [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Queries%20(ELUG)#Historical Queries|Historical Queries]]) against a historical schema of your own design, configure your descriptors with an EclipseLink <tt>HistoryPolicy</tt> that describes your historical schema.
If you want to use historical sessions (see [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Sessions%20(ELUG)#Historical Sessions|Historical Sessions]]) to execute historical queries (see [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Queries%20(ELUG)#Historical Queries|Historical Queries]]) against a historical schema of your own design, configure your descriptors with a EclipseLink <tt>HistoryPolicy</tt> that describes your historical schema.
+
  
 
If you are using an Oracle Database platform for Oracle9''i'' Database Server (or later), you can query the historical versions of objects automatically maintained by the Oracle Database without the need for a history policy. For more information, see [[Configuring%20Historical%20Sessions%20(ELUG)#How to Configure Historical Sessions Using an Oracle Platform|How to Configure Historical Sessions Using an Oracle Platform]].
 
If you are using an Oracle Database platform for Oracle9''i'' Database Server (or later), you can query the historical versions of objects automatically maintained by the Oracle Database without the need for a history policy. For more information, see [[Configuring%20Historical%20Sessions%20(ELUG)#How to Configure Historical Sessions Using an Oracle Platform|How to Configure Historical Sessions Using an Oracle Platform]].
Line 4,155: Line 4,100:
  
 
<span id="Table 115-34"></span>
 
<span id="Table 115-34"></span>
''''' Descriptor Support for History Policy Configuration'''''
 
 
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for History Policy Configuration" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support history policy configuration." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for History Policy Configuration" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support history policy configuration." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
Line 4,199: Line 4,142:
 
'''Example Historical Schema'''
 
'''Example Historical Schema'''
  
As shown in [[#Table 115-35|Example Table for EMPLOYEE]] and [[#Table 115-36|Example History Table EMPLOYEE_HIST]], a common approach is to define a special history table to store past versions of an object: one history table for each regular table that requires historical persistence. The history table typically has the same fields as the corresponding regular table plus fields (such as row start and end) used to define an interval that represents the life time of a particular version.
+
As shown in the [[#Table 115-35|Example Table for EMPLOYEE]] and [[#Table 115-36|Example History Table EMPLOYEE_HIST]], a common approach is to define a special history table to store past versions of an object: one history table for each regular table that requires historical persistence. The history table typically has the same fields as the corresponding regular table plus fields (such as row start and end) used to define an interval that represents the life time of a particular version.
 
+
<br>
+
  
 
{| class="Note oac_no_warn" width="80%" border="1" frame="hsides" rules="groups" cellpadding="3" frame="hsides" rules="groups"
 
{| class="Note oac_no_warn" width="80%" border="1" frame="hsides" rules="groups" cellpadding="3" frame="hsides" rules="groups"
Line 4,208: Line 4,149:
 
|}
 
|}
  
<br>
+
 
  
 
EclipseLink will include the history tables described by a <tt>HistoryPolicy</tt> when you execute a historical query.
 
EclipseLink will include the history tables described by a <tt>HistoryPolicy</tt> when you execute a historical query.
Line 4,281: Line 4,222:
 
<br>
 
<br>
  
Because every record has a start and end interval, the history table can store multiple versions of the same object (with the same primary key). The unique identifier of a particular version is given by the existing primary key, plus the value of the start field. For example, in [[#Table 115-36], the unique identifier of the current version is given by <tt>(EMP_ID, START) = (1, 31/08/2004)</tt>.
+
Because every record has a start and end interval, the history table can store multiple versions of the same object (with the same primary key). The unique identifier of a particular version is given by the existing primary key, plus the value of the start field. For example, in [[#Table 115-36|Example History Table EMPLOYEE_HIST]], the unique identifier of the current version is given by <tt>(EMP_ID, START) = (1, 31/08/2004)</tt>.
  
  
  
 
===How to Configure a History Policy Using Java===
 
===How to Configure a History Policy Using Java===
 
+
This example shows how to describe the schema shown in [[#Table 115-35|Example Table for EMPLOYEE]] and [[#Table 115-36|Example History Table EMPLOYEE_HIST]] using the EclipseLink <tt>HistoryPolicy</tt><nowiki>:</nowiki>
[[#Example 115-25] shows how to describe the schema shown in [[#Table 115-35|Example Table for EMPLOYEE]] and [[#Table 115-36|Example History Table EMPLOYEE_HIST]] using the EclipseLink <tt>HistoryPolicy</tt><nowiki>:</nowiki>
+
 
+
<br>
+
  
  
Line 4,326: Line 4,264:
  
 
====Configuring Write Responsibility====
 
====Configuring Write Responsibility====
 
 
Use <tt>HistoryPolicy</tt> method <tt>setShouldHandleWrites</tt> to specify whether or not EclipseLink is responsible for writing data to history tables. By default, <tt>setShouldHandleWrites</tt> is set to <tt>true</tt>.
 
Use <tt>HistoryPolicy</tt> method <tt>setShouldHandleWrites</tt> to specify whether or not EclipseLink is responsible for writing data to history tables. By default, <tt>setShouldHandleWrites</tt> is set to <tt>true</tt>.
  
Line 4,332: Line 4,269:
  
 
You can configure the database to write data to history tables by way of triggers or stored procedures that customize create, insert, and delete operations to modify both the regular table and the history table appropriately.
 
You can configure the database to write data to history tables by way of triggers or stored procedures that customize create, insert, and delete operations to modify both the regular table and the history table appropriately.
 +
 +
  
 
==Configuring Wrapper Policy==
 
==Configuring Wrapper Policy==
 
 
EclipseLink lets you use wrappers (or proxies) in cases where the persistent class is not the same class that is to be presented to users.
 
EclipseLink lets you use wrappers (or proxies) in cases where the persistent class is not the same class that is to be presented to users.
  
Line 4,341: Line 4,279:
 
In cases where such a wrapper is used, EclipseLink continues to make the class specified in the descriptor persistent, but returns the appropriate instance of the wrapper whenever a persistent object is requested.
 
In cases where such a wrapper is used, EclipseLink continues to make the class specified in the descriptor persistent, but returns the appropriate instance of the wrapper whenever a persistent object is requested.
  
[[#Table 115-37] summarizes which descriptors support a wrapper policy.
+
This table summarizes which descriptors support a wrapper policy.
 
+
  
  
'''''Table 115-37 Descriptor Support for Wrapper Policy'''''
+
<span id="Table 115-37"></span>
 +
'''''Descriptor Support for Wrapper Policy'''''
  
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Wrapper Policy" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support wrapper policy." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Wrapper Policy" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support wrapper policy." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
Line 4,387: Line 4,325:
  
 
If you specify a wrapper policy, EclipseLink uses the policy to ''wrap'' and ''unwrap'' persistent objects as required:
 
If you specify a wrapper policy, EclipseLink uses the policy to ''wrap'' and ''unwrap'' persistent objects as required:
 
 
* Wrapper policies implement the interface <tt>org.eclipse.persistence.descriptors.WrapperPolicy</tt>.
 
* Wrapper policies implement the interface <tt>org.eclipse.persistence.descriptors.WrapperPolicy</tt>.
 
* A wrapper policy is specified by setting the wrapper policy for the EclipseLink descriptor.
 
* A wrapper policy is specified by setting the wrapper policy for the EclipseLink descriptor.
Line 4,406: Line 4,343:
  
 
===How to Configure Wrapper Policy Using Java===
 
===How to Configure Wrapper Policy Using Java===
 
 
Use the <tt>ClassDescriptor</tt> method <tt>setWrapperPolicy</tt> to set the appropriate instance of <tt>WrapperPolicy</tt>.
 
Use the <tt>ClassDescriptor</tt> method <tt>setWrapperPolicy</tt> to set the appropriate instance of <tt>WrapperPolicy</tt>.
  
Line 4,412: Line 4,348:
  
 
==Configuring Fetch Groups==
 
==Configuring Fetch Groups==
 
 
By default, when you execute an object-level read query for a particular object class, EclipseLink returns all the persistent attributes mapped in the object's descriptor. With this single query, all the object's persistent attributes are defined, and calling their <tt>get</tt> methods returns the value directly from the object.
 
By default, when you execute an object-level read query for a particular object class, EclipseLink returns all the persistent attributes mapped in the object's descriptor. With this single query, all the object's persistent attributes are defined, and calling their <tt>get</tt> methods returns the value directly from the object.
  
Line 4,428: Line 4,363:
  
 
<span id="Table 115-38"></span>
 
<span id="Table 115-38"></span>
''''' Descriptor Support for Fetch Group Configuration'''''
 
 
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Fetch Group Configuration" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support fetch group configuration." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Fetch Group Configuration" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support fetch group configuration." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
Line 4,472: Line 4,405:
  
 
For more information, see the following:
 
For more information, see the following:
 
 
* [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)#Fetch Groups|Fetch Groups]]
 
* [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)#Fetch Groups|Fetch Groups]]
 
* [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Queries%20(ELUG)#Fetch Groups and Object-Level Read Queries|Fetch Groups and Object-Level Read Queries]]
 
* [[Introduction%20to%20EclipseLink%20Queries%20(ELUG)#Fetch Groups and Object-Level Read Queries|Fetch Groups and Object-Level Read Queries]]
 
* [[Using%20Advanced%20Query%20API%20(ELUG)#How to Configure Default Fetch Group Behavior|How to Configure Default Fetch Group Behavior]]
 
* [[Using%20Advanced%20Query%20API%20(ELUG)#How to Configure Default Fetch Group Behavior|How to Configure Default Fetch Group Behavior]]
 
* [[Introduction to EclipseLink%20Application%20Development%20(ELUG)#Using Weaving|Using Weaving]]
 
* [[Introduction to EclipseLink%20Application%20Development%20(ELUG)#Using Weaving|Using Weaving]]
* [[Using%20EclipseLink%20JPA%20Extensions%20(ELUG)#Using EclipseLink JPA Weaving|sing EclipseLink JPA Weaving]]
+
* [[Using%20EclipseLink%20JPA%20Extensions%20(ELUG)#Using EclipseLink JPA Weaving|Using EclipseLink JPA Weaving]]
  
  
  
 
===How to Configure Fetch Groups Using Java===
 
===How to Configure Fetch Groups Using Java===
 +
To configure a fetch group, Use a [[#Configuring Amendment Methods|descriptor amendment method]] as this example shows.
  
To configure a fetch group, use a descriptor amendment method (see [[#Configuring Amendment Methods|Configuring Amendment Methods]]) as this example shows.
 
  
<br>
 
 
<span id="Example 115-27"></span>
 
<span id="Example 115-27"></span>
 
''''' Configuring a Fetch Group'''''
 
''''' Configuring a Fetch Group'''''
Line 4,511: Line 4,442:
  
 
==Configuring a Descriptor Customizer Class==
 
==Configuring a Descriptor Customizer Class==
 
+
A descriptor customizer class is a Java class that implements the <tt>org.eclipse.persistence.internal.sessions.factories.DescriptorCustomizer</tt> interface and provides a default (zero-argument) constructor. You can use a descriptor customizer to customize a descriptor at run time on a loaded session before login occurs, similar to how you can use an amendment method (see [[#Configuring Amendment Methods|Configuring Amendment Methods]]).
A descriptor customizer class is a Java class that implements the <tt>org.eclipse.persistence.tools.sessionconfiguration.DescriptorCustomizer</tt> interface and provides a default (zero-argument) constructor. You can use a descriptor customizer to customize a descriptor at run time on a loaded session before login occurs, similar to how you can use an amendment method (see [[#Configuring Amendment Methods]).
+
  
 
This table summarizes which sessions support customizer class configuration.
 
This table summarizes which sessions support customizer class configuration.
Line 4,518: Line 4,448:
  
 
<span id="Table 115-39"></span>
 
<span id="Table 115-39"></span>
''''' Descriptor Support for Customizer Class Configuration'''''
 
 
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Customizer Class Configuration" summary="This table summarizes which sessions support exception handler configuration." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Customizer Class Configuration" summary="This table summarizes which sessions support exception handler configuration." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
Line 4,554: Line 4,482:
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported.]]<br>
 
[[Image:support.gif|Supported.]]<br>
 
|}
 
|}
 
<br>
 
  
 
For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)#Descriptor Customization|Descriptor Customization]].
 
For more information, see [[Introduction%20to%20Descriptors%20(ELUG)#Descriptor Customization|Descriptor Customization]].
Line 4,562: Line 4,488:
  
 
===How to Configure Customizer Class Using Java===
 
===How to Configure Customizer Class Using Java===
 
+
When using Java, create a customize class that implements the <tt>org.eclipse.persistence.internal.sessions.factories.DescriptorCustomizer</tt> interface. This example illustrates the creation of a descriptor customizer.
When using Java, create a customize class that implements the <tt>org.eclipse.persistence.tools.sessionconfiguration.DescriptorCustomizer</tt> interface. This example illustrates the creation of a descriptor customizer.
+
  
 
<br>
 
<br>
Line 4,570: Line 4,495:
  
 
   
 
   
  import org.eclipse.persistence.tools.sessionconfiguration.DescriptorCustomizer;
+
  import org.eclipse.persistence.internal.sessions.factories.DescriptorCustomizer;
 
  import org.eclipse.persistence.descriptors.ClassDescriptor;
 
  import org.eclipse.persistence.descriptors.ClassDescriptor;
 
   
 
   
Line 4,590: Line 4,515:
  
 
This table summarizes which descriptors support amendment methods.
 
This table summarizes which descriptors support amendment methods.
 
  
 
<span id="Table 115-40"></span>
 
<span id="Table 115-40"></span>
''''' Descriptor Support for Amendment Methods'''''
 
 
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Amendment Methods" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support for amendment methods." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
{| class="RuleFormal" dir="ltr" title="Descriptor Support for Amendment Methods" summary="This table summarizes which descriptors support for amendment methods." width="100%" border="1" frame="border" rules="all" cellpadding="3" frame="border" rules="all"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
! id="r1c1-t77" align="left" valign="bottom" | '''Descriptor'''
 
! id="r1c1-t77" align="left" valign="bottom" | '''Descriptor'''
! id="r1c2-t77" align="left" valign="bottom" | '''[[#How to Configure Amendment Methods Using Workbench|Using Workbench]]<br>'''
+
! id="r1c2-t77" align="left" valign="bottom" | '''[[#How to Configure Amendment Methods Using Workbench|Using the Workbench]]<br>'''
 
! id="r1c3-t77" align="left" valign="bottom" | '''How to Use Java'''
 
! id="r1c3-t77" align="left" valign="bottom" | '''How to Use Java'''
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
 
|- align="left" valign="top"
Line 4,630: Line 4,552:
 
|}
 
|}
  
<br>
 
  
 
This section describes how to associate an amendment method with a descriptor.
 
This section describes how to associate an amendment method with a descriptor.
Line 4,643: Line 4,564:
  
 
===How to Configure Amendment Methods Using Workbench===
 
===How to Configure Amendment Methods Using Workbench===
 
 
To use an amendment method with a descriptor (after it is loaded as part of the project) use this procedure:
 
To use an amendment method with a descriptor (after it is loaded as part of the project) use this procedure:
 
 
# Select a descriptor in the '''Navigator'''. Its properties appear in the Editor.If the '''After load''' advanced property is not visible for the descriptor, right-click the descriptor and choose '''Select Advanced Properties''' > '''After Load''' from context menu or from the '''Selected''' menu.
 
# Select a descriptor in the '''Navigator'''. Its properties appear in the Editor.If the '''After load''' advanced property is not visible for the descriptor, right-click the descriptor and choose '''Select Advanced Properties''' > '''After Load''' from context menu or from the '''Selected''' menu.
 
# Click the '''After Load''' tab in the '''Editor'''.<br>''''' After Load Tab'''''<br>[[Image:aftrload.gif|After Load Tab]]<br><br>
 
# Click the '''After Load''' tab in the '''Editor'''.<br>''''' After Load Tab'''''<br>[[Image:aftrload.gif|After Load Tab]]<br><br>
Line 4,665: Line 4,584:
  
 
<br>
 
<br>
 +
 +
 +
 +
----
 +
''[[EclipseLink User's Guide Copyright Statement|Copyright Statement]]''
 +
 +
 +
[[Category: EclipseLink User's Guide]]
 +
[[Category: Release 1]]
 +
[[Category: Task]]

Latest revision as of 09:22, 1 May 2009

Contents

Related Topics
This section describes how to configure EclipseLink project options common to two or more project types.

The following table lists the types of EclipseLink descriptors that you can configure and provides a cross-reference to the type-specific chapter that lists the configurable options supported by that type.


If you are creating... See...

Relational Descriptors

Configuring a Relational Descriptor

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Configuring an Object-Relational Data Type Descriptor

EIS Descriptor Concepts

Configuring an EIS Descriptor

XML Descriptor Concepts

Configuring an XML Descriptor


The Common Descriptor Options table lists the configurable options shared by two or more EclipseLink descriptor types.

For more information, see:


Configuring Common Descriptor Options

This table lists the configurable options shared by two or more EclipseLink descriptor types. In addition to the configurable options described here, you must also configure the options described for the specific Descriptor Types, as shown in the Configuring EclipseLink Descriptor table.


Option to Configure EclipseLink Workbench Java

Primary keys

Supported

Supported

Read-only

Supported

Supported

Unit of work conforming

Supported

Supported

Alias

Supported

Supported

Comments

Supported

Unsupported

Classes

Supported

Unsupported

Named queries

Supported

Supported

Query timeout

Supported

Supported

Cache refreshing

Supported

Supported

Query keys

Supported

Supported

Interface query keys

Supported

Supported

Cache type and size

Supported

Supported

Cache isolation

Supported

Supported

Unit of work cache isolation

Unsupported

Supported

Cache coordination change propagation

Supported

Supported

Cache expiration

Supported

Supported

Cache existence checking

Supported

Supported

Reading subclasses on queries

Supported

Supported

Inheritance for a child class descriptor

Supported

Supported

Inheritance for a parent class descriptor

Supported

Supported

Inheritance expressions for a parent class descriptor

Supported

Supported

Inherited attribute mapping in a subclass

Supported

Supported

Domain object method as an event handler

Supported

Supported

Descriptor event listener as an event handler

Supported

Supported

Locking policy

Supported

Supported

Returning policy

Supported

Supported

Instantiation policy

Supported

Supported

Copy policy

Supported

Supported

Change policy

Unsupported

Supported

History policy

Unsupported

Supported

Wrapper policy

Unsupported

Supported

Fetch groups

Unsupported

Supported

Amendment methods

Supported

Unsupported

Mappings

Supported

Supported



Configuring Primary Keys

A primary key is a unique identifier (made up of one or more persistent attributes) that distinguishes one instance of a class from all other instances of the same type. You use primary keys to define relationships and to define queries.

For the descriptors shown in the Descriptor Support for Primary Keys table, you must configure a primary key and you must ensure that your class contains one or more persistent fields suitable for this purpose.

This table summarizes which descriptors support primary keys.


Descriptor Using the Workbench
Using Java

Relational Descriptors 1

Supported

Supported

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported

EIS Descriptors 2

Supported

Supported

XML Descriptors

Unsupported

Unsupported


1 Relational class descriptors only.
2 EIS root descriptors only.

For a relational class (non-aggregate) descriptor, choose any unique database field or set of unique database fields from the descriptor's associated table.

For an EIS root descriptor, choose any unique attribute or text node or set of unique attributes or text nodes from the descriptor's schema context.


How to Configure Primary Keys Using Workbench

To associate a descriptor with one or more primary keys, use this procedure:

  1. Select a descriptor in the Navigator. Its properties appear in the Editor.
  2. Click the Descriptor Info tab. The Descriptor Info tab appears.
    Descriptor Info Tab, Primary Key Options
    Descriptor Info Tab, Primary Key Options

  3. Complete the Primary Keys options on the tab.


Use this table to enter data in Primary Keys field on the descriptor's Descriptor Info tab to specify the primary key(s):


Field Description
Primary Keys

To specify the primary keys for the table, click Add in order to do the following:

  • For a relational class descriptor, select a database field from the descriptor's associated table.
  • For an EIS root descriptor, select an attribute or text node from the descriptor's schema context. For more information on choosing an element or attribute, see Choosing a Schema Context.

To remove a primary key, select the key and click Remove.


How to Configure Primary Keys Using Java

You can use Java to configure primary keys for the following:


Relational Projects

Use ClassDescriptor method addPrimaryKeyFieldName to specify the primary key field of the descriptor's table. This should be called for each field that makes up the primary key of the table.

If the descriptor has more than one table, and all other tables have the same primary key, use the ClassDescriptor method addPrimaryKeyFieldName to specify the the primary key in the first table.

If the descriptor has more than one table, and each table has a different primary key, use ClassDescriptor method addForeignKeyFieldNameForMultipleTable to map the source foreign key field name to target primary key field name.


EIS Projects

Use EISDescriptor method addPrimaryKeyFieldName to specify the primary key field of the descriptor's class. Call this method for each field that makes up the primary key.


Configuring Read-Only Descriptors

You can configure a relational class or EIS root descriptor as read-only. This indicates that instances of the reference class will never be modified.

Read-only descriptors are usually used within a unit of work as a performance gain, because there is no need to register, clone, and merge the read-only classes. For more information, see Introduction to EclipseLink Transactions.

This table summarizes which descriptors support read-only configuration.

Descriptor Using the Workbench
Using Java

Relational Descriptors 1

Supported

Supported

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported

EIS Descriptor 2

Supported

Supported

XML Descriptors

Unsupported

Unsupported


1 Relational class descriptors only.
2 EIS root descriptors only.

Note: Relational aggregate and EIS composite descriptors get their read-only setting from their owner.



How to Configure Read-Only Descriptors Using Workbench

To configure a descriptor as read-only use this procedure:

  1. Select a descriptor in the Navigator. Its properties appear in the Editor.
  2. Click the Descriptor Info tab. The Descriptor Info tab appears.
    Descriptor Info Tab, Read Only Option
    Descriptor Info Tab, Read Only Option

  3. Select the Read-Only option on the tab. Specify whether this descriptor is read-only or not.

See Also

Configuring Read-Only Descriptors
Configuring a Descriptor


How to Configure Read-Only Descriptors Using Java

Use ClassDescriptor method setReadOnly.


Configuring Unit of Work Conforming at the Descriptor Level

Conforming is a query feature that lets you include new, changed, or deleted objects in queries within a unit of work prior to committing the transaction. This feature enables you to query against your relative logical or transaction view of a data source.

This table summarizes which descriptors support descriptor level unit of work conforming.

Descriptor Using the Workbench
Using Java

Relational Descriptors 1

Supported

Supported

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported

EIS Descriptors 2

Supported

Supported

XML Descriptors

Unsupported

Unsupported


1 Relational Class Descriptors only.
2 EIS Root Descriptors only.

When you configure a descriptor to conform results in a unit of work, when you execute a query in the unit of work, EclipseLink filters the data source result set to the changes currently made in the unit of work. EclipseLink adds new or changed objects that correspond to the query's selection criteria and removes changed objects that no longer correspond to the query's selection criteria.


Note: For EIS root descriptors, only deleted objects would be filtered, not new or changed objects.


Conforming can reduce performance. Before you enable a descriptor for conforming, be aware of its limitations (see How to Use Conforming) and make sure that conforming is actually necessary.

For examples, see the following:


How to Configure Unit of Work Conforming at the Descriptor Level Using Workbench

To conform a descriptor's results in a unit of work, use this procedure:

  1. Select a descriptor in the Navigator. Its properties appear in the Editor.
  2. Click the Descriptor Info tab. The Descriptor Info tab appears.
    Descriptor Info Tab, Conform Results in Unit of Work Option
    Descriptor Info Tab, Conform Results in Unit of Work Option

  3. Select the Conform Results in Unit of Work option on the tab.

Enable or disable conforming: when enabled, this feature ensures that any queries for this descriptor will conform the data source result with the current changes in the unit of work. For more information, see How to Use Conforming.

See Also

Configuring Unit of Work Conforming at the Descriptor Level
Configuring a Descriptor


How to Configure Unit of Work Conforming at the Descriptor Level Using Java

Use ClassDescriptor method setShouldAlwaysConformResultsInUnitOfWork(true).


Configuring Descriptor Alias

This table summarizes which descriptors support descriptor alias configuration.


Descriptor Using the Workbench
Using Java

Relational Descriptors

Supported

Supported

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Unsupported

Unsupported

EIS Descriptors 1

Supported

Supported

XML Descriptors

Unsupported

Unsupported


1 EIS Root Descriptors only.


Note: The alias is also used in JPA – it is the entity name. This is the logical name referenced in JP QL queries. It defaults to the class name without a path information. For more information, see Introduction to Java Persistence API


How to Configure Descriptor Alias Using Workbench

To specify a descriptor alias, use this procedure:

  1. In the Navigator, select a descriptor.
  2. Click the Descriptor Info tab in the Property window.
    Descriptor Info Tab, Descriptor Alias Field
    Descriptor Info Tab, Descriptor Alias Field

  3. In the Descriptor Alias field, enter an alias for this descriptor. The default is the class name.


How to Configure Descriptor Alias Using Java

Use ClassDescriptor method setAlias passing in the descriptor alias as a String. The descriptor alias defaults to the class name.


Configuring Descriptor Comments

You can define a free-form textual comment for each descriptor. You can use these comments however you whish: for example, to record important project implementation details such as the purpose or importance of a descriptor.

Comments are stored in the Workbench project, in the EclipseLink deployment XML file. There is no Java API for this feature.

This table summarizes which descriptors support descriptor comment configuration.


Descriptor Using the Workbench
How to Use Java

Relational Descriptors

Supported

Unsupported

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Unsupported

Unsupported

EIS Descriptors

Supported

Unsupported

XML Descriptors

Supported

Unsupported


How to Configure Descriptor Comments Using Workbench

To create a comment for a descriptor, use this procedure:

  1. In the Navigator, select a descriptor.
  2. Click the Descriptor Info tab in the Property window.
    Descriptor Info Tab, Comment Field
    Descriptor Info Tab, Comment Field

  3. In the Comment field, enter a description of this descriptor.


Configuring Named Queries at the Descriptor Level

A named query is an EclipseLink query that you create and store, by name, in a descriptor's DescriptorQueryManager for later retrieval and execution. Named queries improve application performance because they are prepared once and they (and all their associated supporting objects) can be efficiently reused thereafter making them well suited for frequently executed operations.

If a named query is global to a Class, configure it at the descriptor level. Alternatively, you can configure a named query at the session level.

Use named queries to specify SQL or EclipseLink Expression queries to access your data source.


Note: You can use named queries in JPA (see Using EclipseLink JPA Extensions for Stored Procedure Query). Because the scope of JPA named queries is global to the session, ensure that each named query has a unique name.


Using the Workbench, you can configure named queries for a subset of query types and store them in a descriptor's DescriptorQueryManager.

Using Java, you can create named queries for all query types and store them in a descriptor's DescriptorQueryManager.

This table summarizes which descriptors support named query configuration.


Descriptor Using the Workbench
Using Java

Relational Descriptors 1

Supported

Supported

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported

EIS Descriptor 2

Supported

Supported

XML Descriptors

Unsupported

Unsupported


1 Relational Class Descriptors only.
2 EIS Root Descriptors only.

After you create a named query, you can execute it by name and class on the EclipseLink session (see Using Named Queries).

For more information about named queries, see Named Queries.


How to Configure Named Queries at the Descriptor Level Using Workbench

To create a named query, use this procedure

  1. In the Navigator, select a descriptor. Its properties appear in the Editor.
  2. Click the Queries tab in the Editor. The Queries tab appear with three additional tabs.
  3. Click the Named Queries tab in the Queries tab. The Named Queries tab appears.
    Queries Tab – Named Queries Subtab
    Queries Tab – Named Queries Subtab

  4. Complete each field on the Named Queries tab.

Use the following information to complete each field on this tab:

Field Description
Queries

Lists the existing queries for this descriptor.

  • To create a new query, click Add.
  • To delete an existing query, select the query and click Delete. Workbench prompts for confirmation.
  • To rename an existing query, select the query and click Rename. The Rename dialog box appears. Type a new name for the query and click OK.
Query Variety

Displays the variety of the currently selected query (see Adding Named Queries).

Quick View

Lists the parameters and joined attributes defined for the query. Clicking on a heading in the Quick View area selects the corresponding subtab. You can also remove parameters or attributes from the Quick View area by selecting the item and clicking Remove.


The Named Queries tab includes the following subtabs:

See Also

Configuring Named Queries at the Descriptor Level


Configuring Named Query Type and Parameters

Use this tab to select the query type and add or remove parameters.


Named Queries, General Tab

Named Queries, General Tab

Use the following information to complete each field on this tab:

Field Description
Type

Select the type of query from the list. You can create any of the following query types:

  • ReadAllQuery
  • ReadObjectQuery
  • ReportQuery 1

To create other types of query, you must use Java.

When you change the type of an existing query, Workbench preserves any configuration that is common between the old and new type and warns you if changing the type will result in the loss of configuration that is not shared by the new type.

Parameters

For queries that take parameters, specify the parameters:

  • To add a new parameter, click Add. The Add Query Parameter dialog box appears. Click Browse to select the type, specify a name, and click OK.
  • To delete an existing parameter, select the parameter and click Remove. Workbench prompts for confirmation.
  • To modify an existing parameter, select the parameter and click Edit. The Edit Query Parameter dialog box appears. Modify the name and type of the parameter and click OK.
  • To change the order of the parameters, select an existing parameter and click Up or Down.
Type Select the class of the parameter's type.
Name Enter the name of the parameter.


1 Relational descriptors only.

See Also

Configuring Named Queries at the Descriptor Level


Configuring Named Query Selection Criteria

Use this tab to specify the format of the named query and enter the query string.


Named Queries, Selection Criteria Tab

Named Queries, Selection Criteria Tab

Use the following information to complete each field on this tab:

Field Description
Type Specify if query uses an EclipseLink Expression, SQL, or EJB QL.
Expression or Query String

If the Type is SQL or EJB QL, enter the query string (either SQL or EJB QL). Workbench does not validate the query string.
See a note that follows this table for information on query syntax.



Note: Use a combination of an escape character and a double-quote ( \" ) instead of just a double-quote ( " ) when defining your query using SQL or EJB QL. For example:

SELECT OBJECT(employee) FROM Employee employee WHERE employee.name = \"Bob\"

If you fail to do so, the generated Java code would look as follows:

query.setEJBQLString("SELECT OBJECT(employee) FROM Employee employee WHERE employee.name = "Bob"");

The preceding code produces an error at compile time.If you define your query using the correct syntax, the generated Java code will contain no errors and be similar to the following:

query.setEJBQLString("SELECT OBJECT(employee) FROM Employee employee WHERE employee.name = \"Bob\"");


See Also

Configuring Named Queries at the Descriptor Level


Configuring Read All Query Order

Use this tab to specify how the results of a read all query should be ordered by attribute name.


Named Queries, Order Tab

Named Queries, Order Tab

Select one of the following actions:

  • To add a new attribute by which to order query results, click Add. The Add Ordering Attribute dialog box appears. Select the mapped attribute to order by, specify ascending or descending order, and then click OK.
  • To change the order of the order attributes, select an existing attribute and click Up or Down.
  • To modify an existing order attribute's ordering options, select an existing attribute and click Edit.
  • To remove an order attribute, select an existing attribute and click Remove.


Configuring Named Query Optimization

You can optimize a named query by configuring batch (ReadAllQuery only) or joining (ReadAllQuery and ReadObjectyQuery) attributes.

For more information on using batch reading, see Optimizing Queries, Reading Case 2: Batch Reading Objects, and Using Batch Reading.

For more information on joining, see Join Reading and Object-Level Read Queries and Using Join Reading with ObjectLevelReadQuery.

Use this tab to specify batch reading and joining attributes.


Named Queries, Optimization Tab

Named Queries, Optimization Tab

Select one of the following actions for Batch Read Attributes (ReadAllQuery only):

  • To add a new batch read attribute, click Add. The Add Batch Read Attribute dialog box appears. Select the mapped attribute and click OK.
  • To change the order of the batch read attributes, select an existing attribute and click Up or Down.
  • To modify an existing batch read attribute's options, select an existing attribute and click Edit.
  • To remove a batch read attribute, select an existing attribute and click Remove.

Select one of the following actions for Joined Attributes (ReadAllQuery and ReadObjectQuery):

  • To add a new joined attribute, click Add. The Add Joined Attribute dialog box appears.
    Add Joined Attribute Dialog Box
    Add Joined Attribute Dialog Box

    Select the mapped attribute. Optionally, enable or disable Allows Null or, for a Collection attribute, Allows None. Click OK.
  • To change the order of the joined attributes, select an existing attribute and click Up or Down.
  • To modify an existing joined attribute's options, select an existing attribute and click Edit.
  • To remove a joined attribute, select an existing attribute and click Remove.


Configuring Named Query Attributes

For ReportQuery queries only, you can configure report query functions to apply to one or more attributes.

For more information, see Report Query.

Use this tab to configure report query attributes.


Named Queries, Attributes Tab

Named Queries, Attributes Tab

Select one of the following actions for Attributes (ReportQuery only):

  • To add a new report query attribute, click Add. The Add Joined Attribute dialog box appears. Continue with Adding Report Query Attributes.
  • To change the order of the report query attribute attributes, select an existing attribute and click Up or Down.
  • To modify an existing report query attribute's options, select an existing attribute and click Edit.
  • To remove a report query attribute, select an existing attribute and click Remove.


Note: You can only choose attributes that are configured with a direct mapping (converters included) or a user-defined query key.



Adding Report Query Attributes

Use this dialog box to add a report query attribute.


Add Report Query Attribute Dialog Box

Add Report Query Attribute Dialog Box

Select the attribute you want in this report query and use the following table to complete the dialog box and add the report query attribute:

Option 'Description
Allows None or Allows Null

Use the Allows Null and Allows None options to define an expression with an outer join. Check the Allows Null option to use the ExpressionBuilder method getAllowingNull.

Check the Allows None option for Collection attributes to use the ExpressionBuilder method anyOfAllowingNone.
For more information, see Using EclipseLink Expression API for Joins.

Function

Select from the list of report query functions that EclipseLink provides. This function will be applied to the specified attribute. You must select an attribute for all functions, except Count. Alternatively, you can enter the name of a custom function that you implement in your database. For more information, see Expression method getFunction in the EclipseLink API Reference.

Name The name associated with the calculated value. By default, the name is <AttributeName><FunctionName>.


Enter the necessary information and click OK. Workbench adds the report query attribute to the list of attributes in the Attribute tab.


Configuring Named Query Group/Order Options

For ReportQuery queries only, you can configure grouping and ordering attributes.

For more information, see Report Query.

Use this tab to specify grouping and ordering attributes.


Named Queries, Group/Order Tab

Named Queries, Group/Order Tab

Select one of the following actions for Grouping Attributes (ReportQuery only):

  • To add a new grouping attribute, click Add. The Add Grouping Attribute dialog appears. Select the desired mapped attribute and click OK.
  • To change the order of the grouping attributes, select an existing attribute and click Up or Down.
  • To modify an existing grouping attribute's options, select an existing attribute and click Edit.
  • To remove a grouping attribute, select an existing attribute and click Remove.

Select one of the four following actions for Ordering Attributes (ReportQuery only):

  • To add a new ordering attribute, click Add. The Add Ordering Attribute dialog box appears. Continue with Adding Ordering Attributes.
  • To change the order of the ordering attributes, select an existing attribute and click Up or Down.
  • To modify an existing ordering attribute's options, select an existing attribute and click Edit.
  • To remove an ordering attribute, select an existing attribute and click Remove.


Adding Ordering Attributes

Use this dialog box to add a report query ordering attribute.


Add Ordering Attribute Dialog Box

Add Ordering Attribute Dialog Box

Use the following information to complete the fields on the dialog box and add an ordering attribute:

Option Description
Selected Attribute

Select this option to view a list of the report query attributes you added (see Configuring Named Query Attributes). Select an attribute and choose its ordering option in the Order field.

New Attribute

Select this option to view a list of all class attributes. Select an attribute and choose its ordering option in the Order field.

Order Select ascending or descending.


Enter the necessary information and click OK. Workbench adds the report query attribute to the list of attributes in the Attribute tab.

See Also

Configuring Named Query Attributes


Creating an EIS Interaction for a Named Query

For an EIS root descriptor, you can define EIS interactions to invoke methods on an EIS.

You can use EclipseLink to define an interaction as a named query for read object and read all object queries, as described here. These queries are not called for basic persistence operations (Configuring Custom EIS Interactions for Basic Persistence Operations); you can call these additional queries by name in your application for special purposes.

Use this tab to define an interaction as a named query for read object and read all object queries.


Call Tab

Call Tab

Use the following information to complete each field on the tab:

Field Description
Interaction Type Using Workbench, you can only use XML Interactions. You cannot change this field.
Function Name Specify the name of the EIS function that this call type (Read Object or Read All) invokes on the EIS.
Input Record Name Specify the name passed to the JCA adapter when creating the input record.
Input Root Element Specify the root element name to use for the input DOM.
Input Arguments

Specify the query argument name to map to the interaction field or XPath nodes in the argument record. For example, if you are using XML records, use this option to map input argument name to the XPath name/first-name.

Output Arguments

Specify the result record field or XPath nodes to map the correct nodes in the record used by the descriptor's mappings. For example, if you are using XML records, use this option to map the output fname to name/first-name.

Output arguments are not required if the interaction returns an XML result that matches the descriptor's mappings.

Input Result Path

Use this option if the EIS interaction expects the interaction arguments to be nested in the XML record. For example, specify arguments, if the arguments were to be nested under the root element exec-find-order, then under an arguments element.

Output Result Path

Use this option if the EIS interaction result record contains the XML data that maps to the objects in a nested structure. For example, specify order, if the results were return under a root element results, then under an order element.

Properties Specify any properties required by your EIS platform. For example, property name operation (from AQPlatform.QUEUE_OPERATION) and property value enqueue (from AQPlatform.ENQUEUE).



Configuring Named Query Options

Use this tab to configure additional options for the query.


Named Queries, Options Tab

Named Queries, Options Tab

Use the following information to complete each field on the tab:

Field Description

Refresh Identity Map Results 2

Refreshes the attributes of the object(s) resulting from the query. If cascading is used, the private parts of the objects will also be refreshed.

Cache Statement 1

Caches the prepared statements. This requires full parameter binding as well (see Bind Parameters).

Bind Parameters 1

By default, EclipseLink binds all of the query's parameters. Deselect this option to disable binding.

Cache Usage 2

Selects how EclipseLink should use the session cache when a query is executed:

In Memory Query Indirection 2

Selects how EclipseLink should handle indirection (lazy loading) when an in-memory or conforming query is executed:

  • Throw indirection exception – if this object uses indirection and indirection has not been triggered, EclipseLink will throw an exception.
  • Trigger indirection – if this object uses indirection and indirection has not been triggered, EclipseLink will trigger indirection.
  • Ignore exception return conformed – returns conforming if an untriggered value holder is encountered. That is, you expect results from the database to conform, and an untriggered value holder is taken to mean that the underlying attribute has not changed.
  • Ignore exception return not conformed – returns not conforming if an untriggered value holder is encountered.

For more information, see the following:

Return Choice 3

Selects how EclipseLink should handle ReportQuery results:

  • Result collection – return ReportQuery results as a Collection of ReportQueryResult objects.
  • Single result – return only the first ReportQueryResult object (not wrapped in a Collection or Map). Use this option if you know that the ReportQuery returns only one row.
  • Single value – return only a single value. Use this option if you know that the ReportQuery returns only one row that contains only one attribute.
  • Single attribute – return only a single Collection of values. If the query returns multiple rows, but each row only has a single attribute, this option will return a Collection of values, instead of a Collection of ReportQueryResults.

For more information, see Collection Query Results.

Retrieve Primary Keys 3

Selects whether or not EclipseLink retrieves the primary key values within each result. You can use the primary keys to retrieve the real objects.

  • None – do not retrieve primary keys
  • All – retrieve primary keys for each object read;
  • First – return only the first primary key value (in the case of a composite primary key). This can be used if you just want to know if something exists or not, but do not really care about the value.


1 For more information, see How to Use Parameterized SQL (Parameter Binding) and Prepared Statement Caching for Optimization.
2 For ReadObjectQuery and ReadAllQuery queries only.
3 For ReportQuery queries only.

Click Advanced to configure additional options. See Configuring Named Query Advanced Options.

See Also

Configuring Named Queries at the Descriptor Level


Configuring Named Query Advanced Options

To configure additional advanced query options, use this procedure.

  1. From the Named Queries – Options tab, click Advanced. The Advanced Query Options dialog box appears.From the Named Queries – Options tab, click Advanced. The Advanced Query Options dialog box appears.
    Advanced Query Options Dialog Box
    Advanced Query Options Dialog Box

  2. Complete each field in the Advanced Query Options dialog box.

Use the following information to enter data in each field and click OK:

Field Description
Maintain Cache

Specify whether to use the cache for the query or to build objects directly from the database result. You should only use this option if you are executing a Partial Object Query, whose results cannot be cached. For more information, see How to Disable the Identity Map Cache Update During a Read Query.

Use Wrapper Policy

Specify whether or not the named query will use the wrapper policy configured for this descriptor. For more information, see Configuring Wrapper Policy.

Prepare SQL Once

Specify the setShouldPrepare() for the named query. By default, EclipseLink optimizes queries to generate their SQL only once. You may need to disable this option for certain types of queries that require dynamic SQL based on their arguments, such as the following:

  • Expressions that use equal where the argument value could be null. This may cause problems on databases that require IS NULL, instead of = NULL.
  • Expressions that use in and use parameter binding. This will cause problems as the in values must be bound individually.
Cache Query Results

Specify the cacheQueryResults method for the query. The query will only access the database the first time it is executed. Subsequent execution will return exactly the original result. For more information, see How to Cache Results in a ReadQuery.

Refresh Remote Identity Map Results Specify the refreshRemoteIdentityMapResult method for the query. EclipseLink can refresh the attributes of the object(s) resulting from the query. With cascading, EclipseLink will also refresh the private parts of the object(s).
Exclusive Connection

Specify whether or not the named query will use an exclusive connection. You can also configure exclusive connection acquisition at the session level (see Configuring Connection Policy.

Pessimistic Locking Specify the specific pessimistic locking policy for the query or use the locking policy from the descriptor.
Distinct State Specify if EclipseLink prints the DISTINCT clause, if a distinct has been set. The DISTINCT clause allows you to remove duplicates from the result set.
Query Timeout Specify if the query will time out (or abort) after a specified number of seconds.
Maximum Rows Specify if the query will limit the results to a specified number of rows. Use this to option for queries that could return an excessive number of objects.


See Also

Configuring Named Queries at the Descriptor Level


How to Configure Named Queries at the Descriptor Level Using Java

To configure named queries in Java, Use a descriptor amendment method. The Creating a Named Query with an Amendment Method example illustrates an amendment method that creates a named query and adds it to the DescriptorQueryManager.


Creating a Named Query with an Amendment Method

public class EmployeeAmmendmentMethodClass {
....
    // Create named query with Employee as its reference class

    public static void createEmployeeQuery(ClassDescriptor descriptor) {
        ReadObjectQuery query = new ReadObjectQuery(Employee.class);
        ExpressionBuilder emp = query.getExpressionBuilder();
        Expression firstNameExpression =
            emp.get("firstName").equal(emp.getParameter("firstName"));
        query.setSelectionCriteria(firstNameExpression);
        query.addArgument("firstName");

        descriptor.getQueryManager().addQuery(
                            "employeeReadByFirstName", query);
    }
}

Configuring Query Timeout at the Descriptor Level

You can specify how the EclipseLink runtime handles the duration of queries on a descriptor's reference class. Specifying a query timeout at the descriptor level applies to all queries on the descriptor's reference class. A query timeout ensures that your application does not block forever over a hung or lengthy query that does not return in a timely fashion.

This table summarizes which descriptors support query timeout configuration.


Descriptor Using the Workbench
Using Java

Relational Descriptors 1

Supported

Supported

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported

EIS Descriptor

Unsupported

Unsupported

XML Descriptors

Unsupported

Unsupported


1 Relational Class Descriptors only.

You can also configure a timeout on a per-query basis. For more information, see the following:


How to Configure Query Timeout at the Descriptor Level Workbench

To configure how EclipseLink handles the duration of queries to this descriptor, use this procedure:

  1. Select a descriptor in the Navigator. Its properties appear in the Editor.
  2. Click the Queries tab. The Queries tab appears.
  3. Click the Settings tab. The Settings tab appears.
    Descriptor Queries Settings Tab, Query Timeout Options
    Descriptor Queries Settings Tab, Query Timeout Options

  4. Select the Query Timeout options on the tab.

Use the following table to enter data in the fields on the descriptor's Settings tab to specify how EclipseLink handles query duration:

Field Description
Default Timeout EclipseLink throws a DatabaseException if a query on this descriptor does not return within the timeout period you configure on the parent descriptor. If there is no parent descriptor, the query timeout defaults to No Timeout.
No Timeout EclipseLink blocks until a query on this descriptor returns.
Timeout Enter the timeout period in seconds. EclipseLink throws a DatabaseException if a query on this descriptor does not return within this time.


See Also

Configuring Query Timeout at the Descriptor Level


How to Configure Query Timeout at the Descriptor Level Java

Use DescriptorQueryManager method setQueryTimeout passing in the timeout value as a number of milliseconds.


Configuring Cache Refreshing

By default, EclipseLink caches objects read from a data source (see Introduction to Cache). Subsequent queries for these objects will access the cache and thus improve performance by reducing data source access and avoiding the cost of rebuilding object's and their relationships. Even if a query, such as a read-all query, accesses the data source, if the objects corresponding to the records returned are in the cache, EclipseLink will use the cache objects.

This can lead to stale data in the application. Although using an appropriate locking policy is the only way to ensure that stale or conflicting data does not get committed to the data source, sometimes certain data in the application changes so frequently that it is desirable to always refresh the data, instead of only refreshing the data when a conflict is detected.

You can specify how the EclipseLink runtime handles cache refreshing for all queries on a descriptor's reference class.

This table summarizes which descriptors support query cache refresh configuration.


Descriptor Using the Workbench
Using Java

Relational Descriptors 1

Supported

Supported

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported

EIS Descriptor 2

Supported

Supported

XML Descriptors

Unsupported

Unsupported


1 Relational Class Descriptors only.
2 EIS Root Descriptors only.

Configuring descriptor-level cache refresh may affect performance. As an alternative, consider configuring the following:

For more information, see Optimizing Cache.


How to Configure Cache Refreshing Using Workbench

To configure how EclipseLink refreshes the cache for queries to this descriptor, use this procedure:

  1. Select a descriptor in the Navigator. Its properties appear in the Editor.
  2. Click the Queries tab. The Queries tab appears.
  3. Click the Settings tab. The Settings tab appears.
    Descriptor Queries Settings Tab, Cache Refreshing Options
    Descriptor Queries Settings Tab, Cache Refreshing Options

  4. Select the Refreshing Cache options on the tab.

Use the following table to enter data in the fields on the descriptor's Settings tab to specify how EclipseLink will refresh the cache for queries:

Field Description
Always Refresh

Refreshes the cache on all queries. Avoids stale data by ensuring that any query that accesses the data source will refresh the resulting objects in the cache. This has no effect on queries that get a cache hit and never access the data source, such as read-object primary key queries or in-memory queries.

Configuring descriptor level cache refresh may affect performance. As an alternative, consider configuring:

Only Refresh If Newer Version

Refreshes the cache only if the object in the database is newer than the object in the cache (as determined by the Optimistic Locking field). See Configuring Locking Policy for more information. Improves performance by avoiding unnecessary refreshing of an object if its version matches the data source version. This option does not cause refreshing on its own: you must use it in combination with Always Refresh, query refreshing, or cache expiration.

Disable Cache Hits

When selected, EclipseLink bypasses the cache and goes to the database for read object queries based on primary key. Using this option in conjunction with Always Refresh ensures that EclipseLink always goes to the database. This option ensures that all queries including read-object primary key queries will always access the data source. This option does not cause refreshing on its own: you must use it in combination with Always Refresh.

This option can cause a serious performance issue: avoid whenever possible.



Caution: Use the Always Refresh and Disable Cache Hits properties with caution as they may lead to poor performance. As an alternative, consider configuring cache refresh on a query-by-query basis or configuring cache expiration. For more information, see Optimizing Cache.



How to Configure Cache Refreshing Using Java

Configure cache refresh options using the following ClassDescriptor methods:

  • setShouldAlwaysRefreshCache
  • setShouldAlwaysRefreshCacheOnRemote
  • setShouldDisableCacheHits
  • setShouldDisableCacheHitsOnRemote
  • setShouldOnlyRefreshCacheIfNewerVersion

Use these methods in a descriptor amendment method, as this example illustrates.


Configuring Remote Refreshing

public void addToDescriptor(ClassDescriptor descriptor) {
    descriptor.setShouldRefreshCacheOnRemote(true);
    descriptor.setShouldDisableCacheHitsOnRemote(true);
}


Configuring Query Keys

A query key is a schema-independent alias for a database field name. For example, consider a class Employee with attribute firstName mapped directly to a database field F_NAME in database table EMPLOYEE. Without a query key, when you create a query or expression that involves Employee attribute firstName, you must use the database management system-specific field name F_NAME. This makes it more difficult to build a query and ties the query to the schema. With a query key, you can refer to this field using a schema-independent alias, such as firstName.

This table summarizes which descriptors support query keys.


Descriptor Using the Workbench
Using Java

Relational Descriptors

Supported

Supported

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported

EIS Descriptors

Unsupported

Unsupported

XML Descriptors

Unsupported

Unsupported


Using query keys offers the following advantages:

  • Enhances code readability in EclipseLink expressions and simplifies expression development. You can compose expressions entirely within the context of your object model.
  • Increases portability by making code independent of the database schema. If you rename a field in your schema, you can redefine the query key without changing any code that uses it.
  • Query keys used with interface descriptors allow the implementor descriptor's tables to have different field names.

Query keys are automatically generated for all mapped attributes. The name of the query key is the name of the class attribute specified in your object model.

For information on how to use query keys in queries and expressions, see Query Keys.

When query keys are generated and how you can add or modify query keys depends on the type of mapping or descriptor involved:


Direct Mappings

Workbench automatically generates query keys for all direct mappings at the time you create the mapping.

Workbench provides support for adding or modifying query keys for simple unmapped attributes that could be mapped by a direct mapping: for example, the version field used for optimistic locking or the type field used for inheritance. You cannot modify or remove automatically generated query keys.


Relationship Mappings

EclipseLink automatically generates query keys for all relationship mappings at run time.

For example, if you have a class Customer with attribute orders mapped in a one-to-many relationship to class PurchaseOrders, then the EclipseLink runtime will generate a query key named orders for this Customer attribute.

The Workbench does not currently support adding or modifying the query keys for relationship mappings. If you must add or modify such a query key, you must do so in Java code, using a descriptor amendment method.


Interface Descriptors

Interface descriptors define only the query keys that are shared among their implementors. In the descriptor for an interface, only the name of the query key is specified.

Workbench provides support for choosing the implementors of an interface that share at least one common automatically generated query key.


How to Configure Query Keys Using Workbench

To add query keys to simple unmapped fields and to view the query keys automatically generated for directly mapped attributes, use this procedure:

  1. Select a descriptor in the Navigator. Its properties appear in the Editor.
  2. Click the Query Keys tab in the Editor.
    Queries, Query Keys Tab
    Queries, Query Keys Tab

To add a new query key, click Add.

To delete an existing query key, select the query key and click Remove.

To rename an existing query key, select the query key and click Rename.

Use the Field list to select the field in the table associated with the query key.


How to Configure Query Keys Using Java

To manually create a relationship query key, implement a descriptor amendment method that uses one of the following ClassDescriptor methods to register the query keys:

  • addQueryKey – specify a query key using an instance of QueryKey such as DirectQueryKey, DirectCollectionQueryKey, ManyToManyQueryKey, OneToManyQueryKey, or OneToOneQueryKey.
  • addDirectQueryKey – add a query key that maps directly to the given database field.
  • addAbstractQueryKey – add an abstract query key to an interface descriptor. Any implementors of that interface must define the query key defined by this abstract query key.

The Defining a Query Key, Defining a One-to-Many Query Key, and Defining a Many-to-Many Query Key examples illustrate how to define a query key in Java code.


Defining a Query Key

// Add a query key for the foreign key field using the direct method
descriptor.addDirectQueryKey("managerId", "MANAGER_ID");

// The same query key can also be added through the addQueryKey method
DirectQueryKey directQueryKey = new DirectQueryKey();
directQueryKey.setName("managerId");
directQueryKey.setFieldName("MANAGER_ID");
descriptor.addQueryKey(directQueryKey);

// Add a one-to-one query key for the large project of which the
// employee is a leader (this assumes only one project)
OneToOneQueryKey projectQueryKey = new OneToOneQueryKey();
projectQueryKey.setName("managedLargeProject");
projectQueryKey.setReferenceClass(LargeProject.class);
ExpressionBuilder builder = new ExpressionBuilder();
projectQueryKey.setJoinCriteria(builder.getField(
    "PROJECT.LEADER_ID").equal(builder.getParameter("EMPLOYEE.EMP_ID")));
descriptor.addQueryKey(projectQueryKey);


Defining a One-to-Many Query Key

// Add a one-to-many query key for the projects where the employee
// manages multiple projects 
OneToManyQueryKey projectsQueryKey = new OneToManyQueryKey();
projectsQueryKey.setName("managedProjects");
projectsQueryKey.setReferenceClass(Project.class);
ExpressionBuilder builder = new ExpressionBuilder();
projectsQueryKey.setJoinCriteria(builder.getField(
    "PROJECT.LEADER_ID").equal(builder.getParameter("EMPLOYEE.EMP_ID")));
descriptor.addQueryKey(projectsQueryKey);


Defining a Many-to-Many Query Key

// Add a many-to-many query key to an employee project that uses a join table
ManyToManyQueryKey projectsQueryKey = new ManyToManyQueryKey();
projectsQueryKey.setName("projects");
projectsQueryKey.setReferenceClass(Project.class);
ExpressionBuilder builder = new ExpressionBuilder();
projectsQueryKey.setJoinCriteria(
    (builder.getParameter("EMPLOYEE.EMP_ID").equal(
    builder.getTable("EMP_PROJ").getField("EMP_ID")).and(
    builder.getTable("EMP_PROJ").getField("PROJ_ID").equal(
    builder.getField("PROJECT.PROJ_ID")))));
descriptor.addQueryKey(projectsQueryKey);


The Defining a One-to-One Query Key with an Amendment Method example illustrates how to implement a Descriptor amendment method to define a one-to-one query key. In this example, the object model for the Address class does not include a reference to its owner, an Employee object. You can amend the Address class descriptor to add a query key named owner to make up for this deficiency. At run time, you can compose expressions that select Address objects based on this owner query key.


Defining a One-to-One Query Key with an Amendment Method

// Static amendment method in Address class, addresses do not know 
// their owners in the object model, however you can still
// query on their owner if a user-defined query key is defined
public static void addToDescriptor(Descriptor descriptor) {
    OneToOneQueryKey ownerQueryKey = new OneToOneQueryKey();
    ownerQueryKey.setName("owner");
    ownerQueryKey.setReferenceClass(Employee.class);
    ExpressionBuilder builder = new ExpressionBuilder();
    ownerQueryKey.setJoinCriteria(
        builder.getField("EMPLOYEE.ADDRESS_ID").equal(
        builder.getParameter("ADDRESS.ADDRESS_ID")));
    descriptor.addQueryKey(ownerQueryKey);
}

Configuring Interface Query Keys

A query key is a schema independent alias for a database field name. For more information about query keys, see Configuring Query Keys.

Interface descriptors are defined only with query keys that are shared among their implementors. In the descriptor for an interface, only the name of the query key is specified.

In each implementor descriptor, the key must be defined with the appropriate field from one of the implementor descriptor's tables.

This allows queries and relationship mappings to be defined on the interface using the query key names.

Interface query keys are supported in relational database projects only.

This table summarizes which descriptors support interface query keys.


Descriptor Using the Workbench
Using Java

Relational Descriptors

Supported

Supported

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported

EIS Descriptors

Unsupported

Unsupported

XML Descriptors

Unsupported

Unsupported


Consider an Employee that contains a contact of type Contact. The Contact class is an interface with two implementors: Phone and Email. The Phone class has attributes id and number. The Email class has attributes id and address. This figure illustrates the generated keys:


Automatically Generated Query Keys for Phone and Email

Automatically Generated Query Keys for Phone and Email

Both classes have an attribute, id, that is directly mapped to fields that have different names. However, a query key is generated for this attribute. For the Contact interface descriptor, you must indicate that the id query key must be defined for each of the implementors.

If either of the implementor classes did not have the id query key defined the Workbench would flag that descriptor as deficient.

Now that a descriptor with a commonly shared query key has been defined for Contact, you can use it as the reference class for a variable one-to-one mapping (see Using Queries on Variable One-to-One Mappings).

For example, you can now create a variable one-to-one mapping for the contact attribute of Employee. When you edit the foreign key field information for the mapping, you must match the Employee descriptor's tables to query keys from the Contact interface descriptor.


How to Configure Interface Query Keys Using Workbench

To choose the implementors of an interface that share at least one common automatically generated query key, use this procedure.

  1. Select an interface descriptor in the Navigator. Its properties appear in the Editor.
    Interface Descriptor Editor Window
    Interface Descriptor Editor Window

To choose an implementor of the selected interface that shares at least one common query key, click Add.

To remove an implementor of the selected interface, select the implementor and click Remove.


How to Configure Interface Query Keys Using Java

This example shows how to define the Contact interface and Email and Phone implementors in Java.


Defining Interface Query Keys

Descriptor contactInterfaceDescriptor = new Descriptor();
contactInterfaceDescriptor.setJavaInterface(Contact.class);
contactInterfaceDescriptor.addAbstractQueryKey("id");

Descriptor emailClassDescriptor = new Descriptor();
emailClassDescriptor.setJavaClass(Email.class);
emailClassDescriptor.addDirectQueryKey("id", "E_ID");
emailClassDescriptor.getInterfacePolicy().addParentInterface(Contact.class);
emailClassDescriptor.setTableName("INT_EML");
emailClassDescriptor.setPrimaryKeyFieldName("E_ID");
emailClassDescriptor.setSequenceNumberName("SEQ");
emailClassDescriptor.setSequenceNumberFieldName("E_ID");
emailClassDescriptor.addDirectMapping("emailID", "E_ID");
emailClassDescriptor.addDirectMapping("address", "ADDR");

Descriptor phoneClassDescriptor = new Descriptor();
phoneClassDescriptor.setJavaClass(Phone.class);
phoneClassDescriptor.getInterfacePolicy().addParentInterface(Contact.class);
phoneClassDescriptor.addDirectQueryKey("id", "P_ID");
phoneClassDescriptor.setTableName("INT_PHN");
phoneClassDescriptor.setPrimaryKeyFieldName("P_ID");
phoneClassDescriptor.setSequenceNumberName("SEQ");
phoneClassDescriptor.setSequenceNumberFieldName("P_ID");
phoneClassDescriptor.addDirectMapping("phoneID", "P_ID");
phoneClassDescriptor.addDirectMapping("number", "P_NUM");


Configuring Cache Type and Size at the Descriptor Level

The EclipseLink cache is an in-memory repository that stores recently read or written objects based on class and primary key values. EclipseLink uses the cache to do the following:

  • improve performance by holding recently read or written objects and accessing them in-memory to minimize database access;
  • manage locking and isolation level;
  • manage object identity.

This table summarizes which descriptors support identity map configuration.


Descriptor Using the Workbench
Using Java

Relational Descriptors 1

Supported

Supported

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported

EIS Descriptors 2

Supported

Supported

XML Descriptors

Unsupported

Unsupported


1 Relational Class Descriptors only.
2 EIS Root Descriptors only.

This configuration overrides the default identity map configuration defined at the project level.

For detailed information on caching and object identity, and the recommended settings to maximize EclipseLink performance, see to Cache Type and Object Identity.

For more information, see Introduction to Cache.


How to Configure Cache Type and Size at the Descriptor Level Using Workbench

To specify the identity map information for a descriptor, use this procedure:

  1. Select the descriptor in the Navigator.
  2. Select the Caching tab in the Editor. The Caching tab appears.
    Caching Tab, Identity Map Options
    Caching Tab, Identity Map Options

  3. Complete the fields on theCaching tab to specify the default identity map for the selected descriptor.

Use the following table to enter data in following fields on the Caching tab:

Field Description

Type 1

Use the Type list to choose the identity map as follows:

For more information, see Cache Type and Object Identity.

Changing the project's default identity map does not affect descriptors that already exist in the project.

Size 1

Specify the size of the cache as follows:

  • When using Weak with Soft Subcache or Weak with Hard Subcache, the size is the size of the subcache.
  • When using Full or Weak, the size indicates the starting size of the identity map.
Default When you enter a cache size, the Default check box is cleared. To reset the size to the default for the selected cache type, check the Default check box.


1 If a descriptor is a child in an inheritance hierarchy, EclipseLink makes this field read only and displays the options from the parent root descriptor.


How to Configure Cache Type and Size at the Descriptor Level Using Java

Use one of the following ClassDescriptor methods to configure the descriptor to use the appropriate type of identity map:

  • useFullIdentitMap
  • useWeakIdentityMap
  • useSoftIdentityMap
  • useSoftCacheWeakIdentityMap
  • useHardCacheWeakIdentityMap
  • useNoIdentityMap

Use the ClassDescriptor method setIdentityMapSize to configure the size of the identity map.


Configuring Cache Isolation at the Descriptor Level

If you plan to use isolated sessions, you must configure descriptors as isolated for any object that you want confined to an isolated session cache.

Configuring a descriptor to be isolated means that EclipseLink will not store the object in the shared session cache and the object will not be shared across client sessions. Each client will have their own object read directly from the database. Objects in an isolated client session cache can reference objects in their parent server session's shared session cache, but no objects in the shared session cache can reference objects in an isolated client session cache. Isolation is required when using Oracle Database Virtual Private Database (VPD) support or database user-based read security. Isolation can also be used if caching is not desired across client sessions.

This table summarizes which descriptors support cache isolation configuration.


Descriptor Using the Workbench
Using Java

Relational Descriptors 1

Supported

Supported

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported

EIS Descriptors 2

Supported

Supported

XML Descriptors

Unsupported

Unsupported


1 Relational Class Descriptors only.
2 EIS Root Descriptors only.

This configuration overrides the default cache isolation configuration defined at the project level.


Note: If you configure a descriptor as isolated, it cannot participate in a coordinated cache (see Configuring Cache Coordination Change Propagation at the Descriptor Level).


How to Configure Cache Isolation at the Descriptor Level Using Workbench

To specify the cache isolation options, use this procedure:

  1. Select the descriptor in the Navigator.
  2. Select the Caching tab in the Editor. The Caching tab appears.
    Caching Tab, Isolation Options
    Caching Tab, Isolation Options

  3. Complete the Isolation options on the Caching tab.

Use the Isolation list to choose one of the following:

  • Isolated – if you want all objects confined to an isolated client session cache. For more information, see Cache Isolation.
  • Shared – if you want all objects visible in the shared session cache (default).


How to Configure Cache Isolation at the Descriptor Level Using Java

To specify that a class is isolated, Use a descriptor amendment method to call ClassDescriptor method setIsIsolated, passing in a boolean of true.


Configuring Unit of Work Cache Isolation at the Descriptor Level

Use this policy to determine how a unit of work uses a session cache for a specific class. This table lists the unit of work cache isolation options.


Option Description

Using the Session Cache After the Transaction

USE_SESSION_CACHE_AFTER_TRANSACTION

Objects built from new data accessed after a unit of work early transaction are stored in the session cache.This options is the most efficient as it allows the cache to be used after an early transaction.

Isolating New Data After the Transaction

ISOLATE_NEW_DATA_AFTER_TRANSACTION (default)

Objects built from new data accessed after a unit of work early transaction are only stored in the unit of work.

This still allows previously cached objects to be accessed in the unit of work after an early transaction, while ensuring that uncommitted data will never be put in the session cache by storing any object built from new data only in the unit of work

Isolating the Cache after the Transaction

ISOLATE_CACHE_AFTER_TRANSACTIONAfter a unit of work early transaction the session cache is no longer used for this class. Objects are directly built from the database data and only stored in the unit of work, even if previously cached.

Note: This option may affect performance because you are bypassing the session cache after an early transaction.

Always Isolating the Cache

ISOLATE_CACHE_ALWAYS

The session cache will never be used for the class. Objects are directly built from the database data and only stored in the unit of work. New objects and changes will never be merged into the session cache.

Note: This option my affect performance because you are bypassing the session cache. However if this class is isolated or pessimistic locked and always accessed in a transaction, this can avoid having to build two copies of the object.


Most of these options apply only to a unit of work in an early transaction, such as the following:

  • A unit of work that was flushed (write changes).
  • Issued a modify query.
  • Acquired a pessimistic lock.


How to Configure Unit of Work Cache Isolation at the Descriptor Level Using Java

To specify that a class is isolated, use a descriptor amendment method to call ClassDescriptor method setUnitOfWorkCacheIsolationLevel.


Configuring Cache Coordination Change Propagation at the Descriptor Level

If you plan to use a coordinated cache, you can configure how, and under what conditions, a coordinated cache propagates changes for a given descriptor.

This table summarizes which descriptors support cache isolation configuration.


Descriptor Using the Workbench
Using Java

Relational Descriptors 1

Supported

Supported

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported

EIS Descriptors 2

Supported

Supported

XML Descriptors

Unsupported

Unsupported


1 Relational Class Descriptors only.
2 EIS Root Descriptors only.

This configuration overrides the default cache coordination change propagation configuration defined at the project level (see Configuring Cache Coordination Change Propagation at the Project Level).

To complete your coordinated cache configuration, see Configuring a Coordinated Cache.


Note: If you configure a descriptor as isolated (see Configuring Cache Isolation at the Descriptor Level), it cannot participate in a coordinated cache.



How to Configure Cache Coordination Change Propagation at the Descriptor Level Using Workbench

To specify the coordinated cache change propagation options, use this procedure:

  1. Select the descriptor in the Navigator.
  2. Select the Caching tab in the Editor. The Caching tab appears.
    Caching Tab, Coordination Options
    Caching Tab, Coordination Options

  3. Complete the Coordination options on the Caching tab.

Use the following information to enter data in the Coordination field:


Coordination Option Description When to Use
None For both existing and new instances, do not propagate a change notification. Infrequently read or changed objects.
Synchronize Changes

For an existing instance, propagate a change notification that contains each changed attribute. For a new instance, propagate an object creation (along with all the new instance's attributes) only if the new instance is related to other existing objects that are also configured with this change propagation option.

Frequently read or changed objects that contain few attributes or in cases where only a few attributes are frequently changed. Objects that have many or complex relationships.

Synchronize Changes and New Objects

For an existing instance, propagate a change notification that contains each changed attribute. For a new instance, propagate an object creation (along with all the new instance's attributes).

Frequently read or changed objects that contain few attributes or in cases where only a few attributes are frequently changed. Objects that have few or simple relationships.

Invalidate Changed Objects

For an existing instance, propagate an object invalidation that marks the object as invalid in all other sessions. This tells other sessions that they must update their cache from the data source the next time this object is read. For a new instance, no change notification is propagated.

Frequently read or changed objects that contain many attributes in cases where many of the attributes are frequently changed.


See Also

Configuring Cache Coordination Change Propagation at the Descriptor Level
Configuring Cache Coordination Change Propagation at the Project Level
Introduction to Cache


How to Configure Cache Coordination Change Propagation at the Descriptor Level Using Java

Use a descriptor amendment method to invoke ClassDescriptor method setCacheSynchronizationType passing in one of the following parameters:

  • ClassDescriptor.DO_NOT_SEND_CHANGES
  • ClassDescriptor.SEND_OBJECT_CHANGES
  • ClassDescriptor.SEND_NEW_OBJECTS_WITH_CHANGES
  • ClassDescriptor.INVALIDATE_CHANGED_OBJECTS



Configuring Cache Expiration at the Descriptor Level

By default, objects remain in the cache until they are explicitly deleted (see Deleting Objects) or garbage-collected when using a weak identity map (see Configuring Cache Isolation at the Project Level). Alternatively, you can configure an object with a CacheInvalidationPolicy that allows you to specify, either automatically or manually, that an object is invalid: when any query attempts to read an invalid object, EclipseLink will go to the data source for the most up-to-date version of that object and update the cache with this information.

Using cache invalidation ensures that your application does not use stale data. It provides a better performing alternative to always refreshing (see Configuring Cache Refreshing).

This table summarizes which descriptors support a cache invalidation policy.


Descriptor Using the Workbench
Using Java

Relational Descriptors 1

Supported

Supported

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported

EIS Descriptors 2

Supported

Supported

XML Descriptors

Unsupported

Unsupported


1 Relational Class Descriptors only.
2 EIS Root Descriptors only.

You can override the project-level cache invalidation configuration (see Configuring Cache Expiration at the Project Level) by defining cache invalidation at the descriptor or query level (see How to Configure Cache Expiration at the Query Level).

You can customize how EclipseLink communicates the fact that an object has been declared invalid to improve efficiency, if you are using a coordinated cache. For more information, see Configuring Cache Coordination Change Propagation at the Descriptor Level.

For more information, see Cache Invalidation.


How to Configure Cache Expiration at the Descriptor Level Using Workbench

To specify the cache invalidation information for a descriptor, use this procedure:

  1. Select the descriptor in the Navigator.
  2. Select the Caching tab in the Editor. The Caching tab appears.
    Caching Tab, Expiration Options
    Caching Tab, Expiration Options

  3. Complete the Cache Expiry options on the tab.


Use this table to enter data in the following fields on the Caching tab to specify the cache invalidation policy for the descriptors.

Field Description
Project Default

Use the project's cache expiration options for this descriptor. See Configuring Cache Expiration at the Project Level for more information.

No Expiry Specify that objects in the cache do not expire.
Time to Live Expiry Specify that objects in the cache will expire after a specified amount of time. Use the Expire After field to indicate the time (in milliseconds) after which the objects will expire.
Daily Expiry Specify that objects in the cache will expire at a specific time each day. Use the Expire At field to indicate the exact time to the second (using a 24-hour clock) at which the objects will expire.
Update Read Time on Update Specify if EclipseLink should reset the cached object's expiry time after the EclipseLink successfully updates the object.



Note: These options apply per descriptor. See Configuring Cache Expiration at the Project Level for information on configuring project-level options.


See Also

Configuring Cache Expiration at the Descriptor Level
Configuring Cache Expiration at the Project Level


How to Configure Cache Expiration at the Descriptor Level Using Java

Use ClassDescriptor method setCacheInvalidationPolicy to set an appropriate instance of CacheInvalidationPolicy.


Configuring Cache Existence Checking at the Descriptor Level

When EclipseLink writes an object to the database, EclipseLink runs an existence check to determine whether to perform an insert or an update.

When using JPA, EclipseLink checks against the database by default. When using the EclipseLink Native API it checks against the cache by default. We recommend that you use the default existence check option for most applications.

This table summarizes which descriptors support existence checking.


Descriptor Using the Workbench
Using Java

Relational Descriptors 1

Supported

Supported

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported

EIS Descriptors 2

Supported

Supported

XML Descriptors

Unsupported

Unsupported


1 Relational Class Descriptors only.
2 EIS Root Descriptors only.

You can configure existence checking at the descriptor level to override the project level configuration (see Configuring Existence Checking at the Project Level).

For more information see the following:


How to Configure Cache Existence Checking at the Descriptor Level Using Workbench

To specify the existence checking information for a descriptor, use this procedure:

  1. Select the descriptor in the Navigator.
  2. Select the Caching tab in the Editor. The Caching tab appears.
    Caching Tab, Existence Checking Options
    Caching Tab, Existence Checking Options

  3. Complete the Existence Checking options on the tab.


Use this table to enter data in the following fields of the tab to specify the existence checking options for newly created descriptors:

Field Description
Check Cache Check the session cache. If the object is not in the cache, assume that the object does not exist (do an insert). If the object is in the cache, assume that the object exists (do an update). We recommend using this option for most applications.
Check Cache then Database

If an object is not in the cache, query the database to determine if the object exists. If the object exists, do an update. Otherwise, do an insert. Selecting this option may negatively impact performance. For more information, see Using Check Database.

Assume Existence

Always assume objects exist: always do an update (never do an insert). For more information, see Using Assume Existence.

Assume Non-Existence

Always assume objects do not exist: always do an insert (never do an update). For more information, see Using Assume Nonexistence.



How to Configure Cache Existence Checking at the Descriptor Level Using Java

To configure existence checking at the descriptor level using Java, use ClassDescriptor method getQueryManager to acquire the DescriptorQueryManager from the descriptor and then use one of the following DescriptorQueryManager methods (see the Configuring Existence Checking Using Java example):

  • checkCacheForDoesExist – check the session cache. If the object is not in the cache, assume that the object does not exist (do an insert). If the object is in the cache, assume that the object exists (do an update). We recommend using this option for most applications.
  • checkDatabaseForDoesExist – if an object is not in the cache, query the database to determine if the object exists. If the object exists, do an update. Otherwise, do an insert. Selecting this option may negatively impact performance. For more information, see Using Check Database.
  • assumeExistenceForDoesExist – always assume objects exist: always do an update (never do an insert). For more information, see Using Assume Existence.
  • assumeNonExistenceForDoesExist – always assume objects do not exist: always do an insert (never do an update). For more information, see Using Assume Nonexistence.


Configuring Existence Checking Using Java

descriptor.getQueryManager().checkCacehForDoesExist();

Configuring Reading Subclasses on Queries

If you are mapping an inheritance hierarchy, by default, queries on root or branch classes return instances of the root class and their subclasses.

Alternatively, you can configure a root or branch class descriptor to do the following:

  • not include subclasses when the root or branch class is queried;
  • outer-join subclasses when the root or branch class is queried.

You can also specify a database view to optimize the reading of subclasses. The view can be used to optimize queries for root or branch classes that have subclasses spanning multiple tables. The view must apply an outer-join or union all of the subclass tables.

Do not configure this option for leaf classes.

This table summarizes which descriptors support inherited attribute mapping configuration.



Descriptor Using the Workbench
Using Java

Relational Descriptors

Supported

Supported

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported

EIS Descriptors

Unsupported

Unsupported

XML Descriptors

Unsupported

Unsupported


For more information, see Descriptors and Inheritance.


How to Configure Reading Subclasses on Queries Using Workbench

To configure reading classes on subqueries, use this procedure:

  1. In the Navigator, select a root or branch descriptor.If the Inheritance advanced property is not visible for the descriptor, right-click the descriptor and choose Select Advanced Properties > Inheritance from context menu or from the Selected menu.
  2. Click the Inheritance tab.
    Inheritance Tab, Read Subclasses on Query Option
    Inheritance Tab, Read Subclasses on Query Option

  3. Enter data in the Read Subclasses on Query section on the Inheritance tab.

Use the following information to enter data in Read Subclasses on Query and Read Subclasses View fields of the tab:


Field Description
Read Subclasses on Query Select this option to configure the root class descriptor to instantiate a subclass when the root class is queried.
Read Subclasses View Optionally select a database view to use for reading subclasses.
Outer Join All Subclasses Optionally use the outerJoinAllSubclsses option to optimize the query.


See Also

Configuring Reading Subclasses on Queries


How to Configure Reading Subclasses on Queries Using Java

Create a descriptor amendment method to customize the root or branch class descriptor's InheritancePolicy.

This example shows an amendment method for the Person class. In this example, you use the InheritancePolicy method dontReadSubclassesOnQueries to configure the descriptor so that subclasses are not read on queries.


Configuring Reading Subclasses on Queries

...
public static void addToPersonDescriptor(Descriptor descriptor) {
    descriptor.getInheritancePolicy().dontReadSubclassesOnQueries();
}
...


This example shows an amendment method for the Person class. In this example, you use the InheritancePolicy method setReadAllSubclassesViewName to optimize multiple table inheritance queries.


Configuring Reading Subclasses on Queries Using a View Name

...
public static void addToPersonDescriptor(Descriptor descriptor) {
    descriptor.getInheritancePolicy().setReadAllSubclassesViewName(myView);
}
...


This example shows an amendment method for the Person class. In this example, you use the InheritancePolicy method setShouldOuterJoinSubclasses to configure the descriptor so that subclasses are outer-joined on queries.


Configuring Outer-Joining Subclasses on Queries

...
public static void addToPersonDescriptor(Descriptor descriptor) {
    descriptor.getInheritancePolicy().setShouldOuterJoinSubclasses(true);
}
...


Configuring Inheritance for a Child (Branch or Leaf) Class Descriptor

Inheritance describes how a derived (child) class inherits the characteristics of its superclass (parent). When you designate a class as a child, you must also specify the descriptor that represents the child's parent in your inheritance hierarchy.

This table summarizes which descriptors support child inheritance configuration.


Descriptor Using the Workbench
Using Java

Relational Descriptors

Supported

Supported

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported

EIS Descriptors

Supported

Supported

XML Descriptors

Supported

Supported


For more information about inheritance, see Descriptors and Inheritance.

For more information about configuring inheritance for a parent (root) class descriptor, see Configuring Inheritance for a Parent (Root) Descriptor.


How to Configure Inheritance for a Child (Branch or Leaf) Class Descriptor Using Workbench

To create a child (branch or leaf class) for an inheritance, use this procedure.

  1. In the Navigator, select the descriptor you wish to specify as a child.
  2. Choose the Inheritance tab in the Property window.If the Inheritance tab is not visible, right-click the descriptor and choose Select Advanced Properties > Inheritance.
  3. Select the Is Child Descriptor option to specify this descriptor is a child class. The Parent Descriptor list is now enabled and the class indicator information is disabled.
    Inheritance Tab, Child Descriptor Option
    Inheritance Tab, Child Descriptor Option

  4. Complete each child descriptor option on the Inheritance tab.

Use the following information to enter data in each child descriptor field on the tab:


Field Description
Is Child Descriptor Specify that this descriptor is a child class to be used in a branch or leaf.
Parent Descriptor

Use the list to select the parent of this descriptor. See Descriptors and Inheritance for more information.


See Also

Configuring Inheritance for a Child (Branch or Leaf) Class DescriptorConfiguring Inheritance for a Child (Branch or Leaf) Class Descriptor
Descriptors and Inheritance


How to Configure Inheritance for a Child (Branch or Leaf) Class Descriptor Using Java

Using Java, you can configure an inheritance child descriptor using InheritancePolicy method setParentClass, as this example shows.


Configuring an Inheritance Child Descriptor

descriptor.getInheritancePolicy().setParentClass(ChildClass.class);


Configuring Inheritance for a Parent (Root) Descriptor

Inheritance describes how a derived (child) class inherits the characteristics of its superclass (parent). When you designate a class as a parent, you can configure how EclipseLink handles the class's inheritance hierarchy.

The following table summarizes which descriptors support parent inheritance configuration.


Descriptor Using the Workbench
Using Java

Relational Descriptors

Supported

Supported

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported

EIS Descriptors

Supported

Supported

XML Descriptors

Supported

Supported


For more information about configuring inheritance for a child (branch or leaf) class descriptor, see Configuring Inheritance for a Child (Branch or Leaf) Class Descriptor.

For more information, see Descriptors and Inheritance.


How to Configure Inheritance for a Parent (Root) Descriptor Using Workbench

To create a root class for an inheritance, use this procedure.

  1. In the Navigator, select the descriptor you wish to specify as the root.
  2. Choose the Inheritance tab in the Property window.If the Inheritance tab is not visible, right-click the descriptor and choose Select Advanced Properties > Inheritance.
  3. Select the Is Root Parent Descriptor option to specify this descriptor is a root class.
    Inheritance Tab, Configuring Inheritance for a Root Descriptor
    Inheritance Tab, Configuring Inheritance for a Root Descriptor

  4. Complete each root descriptor option on the Inheritance tab.

Use this table to complete the following root descriptor field on the Inheritance tab:


Field Description
Is Root Parent Descriptor Select this option to specify this descriptor as the root (parent) of the inheritance hierarchy.
Use Class Extraction Method

Choose this option to specify a class indicator using a class extraction method, and select your static class extraction method from the list. For more information, see Using Class Extraction Methods.

Use Class Indicator Field

Choose this option to specify a class indicator using a class indicator field. For more information, see Using Class Indicator Fields.

Field Selection Choose the field to use as the class indicator field.

Use XML Schema "Type" Attribute 1

Select this option to use the type attribute specified in the XML schema for this descriptor's reference class.
Specify Field

For a relational descriptor, select the field of the database table associated with this descriptor (see Configuring Associated Tables). For an EIS root descriptor (using XML records) or an XML descriptor, click Browse to select an element attribute or text node.

Indicator Selection Choose between using a class name as the class indicator field value or specifying specific class indicator field values for each (nonabstract) child class.
Use Class Name as Indicator Choose this option to use class names as the class indicator field value.
Use Class Indicator Dictionary

Choose this option to specify specific class indicator field values for each (nonabstract) child class. When you choose this option, you must specify the data type of the class indicator field and the specific class indicator field values for each (nonabstract) child class.

Indicator Type

Select the data type from the list to specify the data type of the class indicator field. To specify the specific class indicator field values for each (nonabstract) child class, click Edit and enter the appropriate value for each child class.


1 EIS root (see EIS Root Descriptors) or XML descriptors (see XML Descriptor Concepts) only.


How to Configure Inheritance for a Parent (Root) Descriptor Using Java

Create a descriptor amendment method to customize the root class descriptor's inheritance policy using InheritancePolicy methods setParentClass, setClassIndicatorFieldName, addClassIndicator, useClassNameAsIndicator and setClassExtractionMethodName, as required.

The following example shows amendment methods for the Person and Student classes where Student extends Person in a relational project. In this example, a class indicator field is used (see Using Class Indicator Fields).


Configuring Inheritance for a Relational Root Class

...
public static void addToPersonDescriptor(Descriptor descriptor) {
    descriptor.getInheritancePolicy().setClassIndicatorFieldName("CLIENT_TYPE");
    descriptor.getInheritancePolicy().addClassIndicator(Student.class, indicator);
}

public static void addToStudentDescriptor(Descriptor descriptor) {
    descriptor.getInheritancePolicy().setParentClass(Person.class);
}
...


If you are using a class-extraction method (see Using Class Extraction Methods), you may also need to use InheritancePolicy methods setOnlyInstancesExpression and setWithAllSubclassesExpression (see Configuring Inheritance Expressions for a Parent (Root) Class Descriptor).

The following example shows amendment methods for the Person and Student classes where Student extends Person in an EIS project using XML records. In this example, a class indicator field is used (see Using Class Indicator Fields).


Configuring Inheritance for an EIS Root Class

...
public static void addToPersonDescriptor(Descriptor descriptor) {
    descriptor.getInheritancePolicy().setClassIndicatorField(new XMLField("@CLIENT_TYPE"));
    descriptor.getInheritancePolicy().addClassIndicator(Student.class, indicator);
}

public static void addToStudentDescriptor(Descriptor descriptor) {
    descriptor.getInheritancePolicy().setParentClass(Person.class);
    descriptor.getInheritancePolicy().setClassIndicatorField(new XMLField("@CLIENT_TYPE"));
}
...


Configuring Inheritance Expressions for a Parent (Root) Class Descriptor

If your class uses inheritance (see Descriptors and Inheritance) with a class extraction method (see Using Class Extraction Methods) you must provide EclipseLink with expressions to correctly filter sibling instances for all classes that share a common table.

This table summarizes which descriptors support inheritance expression configuration.


Descriptor How to Use Workbench Using Java

Relational Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported

EIS Descriptors

Unsupported

Unsupported

XML Descriptors

Unsupported

Unsupported


The Example Inheritance Hierarchy figure shows a typical inheritance hierarchy. In this example, instances of both Person and Student are stored in the same PERSON table, as the PERSON Table figure shows: an instance of Person has a null value for STUDENT_NUMBER. Instances of Company are stored in a separate COMPANY table.


Example Inheritance Hierarchy

Example Inheritance Hierarchy


PERSON Table

PERSON Table


Queries on inheritance classes that share a common table, such as Person and Student, must filter out their sibling instances. EclipseLink performs this filtering using the Expression instances returned by the descriptor's InheritancePolicy methods getOnlyInstancesExpression and getWithAllSubclassesExpression.

Queries on a class that has its own table for its specific data, such as Company, and does not share this table with any sibling classes, do not require these expressions.

If you use a class indicator type field (see Using Class Indicator Fields), EclipseLink automatically generates the required expressions.

If you use a class extraction method (see Using Class Extraction Methods), you must provide EclipseLink with an expressions to correctly filter sibling instances for all classes that share a common table.

For concrete classes, you must define an only- instances expression.

For branch classes, you must define a with-all-subclasses expression.

When EclipseLink queries for a leaf class, it uses the only- instances expression to filter out any sibling classes.

When EclipseLink queries for a root or branch class whose subclasses do not define their own tables, it uses the with-all-subclasses expression. This is also the case when a subclass view is used (see Configuring Reading Subclasses on Queries).

When querying for a root or branch class that has subclasses that span multiple tables, a query is performed for each concrete class in the inheritance hierarchy using the only- instances expression to filter sibling classes.

When a class extraction method is used the only-instances expression is used to determine if a class is concrete. If a class does not require an only instances expression, do not enable reading subclasses on queries (see Configuring Reading Subclasses on Queries), otherwise EclipseLink will assume that the class has no instances and it will skip that class on queries.

For more information about inheritance expressions, see Specifying Expressions for Only-Instances and With-All-Subclasses.


How to Configure Inheritance Expressions for a Parent (Root) Class Descriptor Using Java

Create a descriptor amendment method to customize the root class descriptor's InheritancePolicy using InheritancePolicy methods setOnlyInstancesExpression and setWithAllSubclassesExpression, as required.

This example shows amendment methods for the Person and Student descriptors based on the class hierarchy shown in the Example Inheritance Hierarchy figure and the database table shown in the PERSON Table figure.


Configuring Only-Instances Expressions

...
// Only-instances expression for Person
public static void addToPersonDescriptor(Descriptor descriptor) {
    ExpressionBuilder builder = new ExpressionBuilder();
    descriptor.getInheritancePolicy().setOnlyInstancesExpression(
                              builder.getField("STUDENT_NUMBER").isNull());
}

// Only-instances expression for Student
public static void addToStudentDescriptor(Descriptor descriptor) {
    ExpressionBuilder builder = new ExpressionBuilder();
    descriptor.getInheritancePolicy().setOnlyInstancesExpression(
                              builder.getField("STUDENT_NUMBER").notNull());
}
...


The Configuring Only-Instances and With-All-Subclasses Expressions example shows amendment methods for the Bicycle and NonFueledVehicle descriptors based on the class hierarchy shown in Figure 14-1 if the vehicle hierarchy stored all of the classes in a single vehicle table, and there was not a class indicator, but a class extraction method instead.


Configuring Only-Instances and With-All-Subclasses Expressions

// Bicycle amemndment
public static void addToBicycleDescriptor(Descriptor descriptor) {
    ExpressionBuilder builder = new ExpressionBuilder();
    descriptor.getInheritancePolicy().setOnlyInstancesExpression(
                              builder.getField("BICYCLE_DESCR").notNull());
}

// NonFueldVehicle ammendment
public static void addToNonFueledVehicleDescriptor(Descriptor descriptor) {
    ExpressionBuilder builder = new ExpressionBuilder();
    descriptor.getInheritancePolicy().setWithAllSubclassesExpression(
                                    builder.getField("FUEL_TYPE").isNull());
}

Configuring Inherited Attribute Mapping in a Subclass

If you are defining the descriptor for a class that inherits attributes from another class, then you can create mappings for those attributes. If you remap an attribute that was already mapped in the superclass, then the new mapping applies to the subclass only. Any other siblings that inherit the attribute are unaffected.

If you leave inherited attributes unmapped, EclipseLink uses the mapping (if any) from the superclass if the superclass's descriptor has been designated as the parent descriptor.

This table summarizes which descriptors support inherited attribute mapping configuration.


Descriptor Support for Inherited Attribute Mapping Configuration

Descriptor Using the Workbench
Using Java

Relational Descriptors

Supported

Supported

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported

EIS Descriptors

Supported

Supported

XML Descriptors

Supported

Supported


For more information, see Descriptors and Inheritance.


How to Configure Inherited Attribute Mapping in a Subclass Using Workbench

To map inherited attributes, use this procedure:

  1. In the Navigator, right-click a descriptor and choose Map Inherited Attributes > selected class from the context menu or choose Selected > Map Inherited Attributes from the menu.The mappings list now includes all the attributes from the superclass of this class.
  2. Map any desired attributes. See Creating a Mapping for more information.


How to Configure Inherited Attribute Mapping in a Subclass Using Java

Using Java, attributes inherited by a subclass from a superclass will be visible and you can always create a mapping to these inherited attributes.

Configuring a Domain Object Method as an Event Handler

You can associate a domain object method with any of the descriptor events shown in the Descriptor Events table. You can register any domain object method that complies with the following criteria:

  • Is public.
  • Returns void.
  • Takes a single parameter of type DescriptorEvent

This table summarizes which descriptors support domain object method event handler configuration.


Descriptor Support for Domain Object Method Event Handler Configuration

Descriptor Using the Workbench
Using Java

Relational Descriptors

Supported

Supported

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported

EIS Descriptors

Supported

Supported

XML Descriptors

Unsupported

Unsupported


For example, you can add a method handlePostDelete (that is public, returns void, and takes a single parameter of type DescriptorEvent) to your Employee object to handle PostDeleteEvent descriptor events. After you register that method with the DescriptorEventManager owned by the Employee object's descriptor as the handler for PostDeleteEvent descriptor events, whenever the EclipseLink runtime performs a post-delete operation on an instance of the Employee object, the runtime dispatches a PostDeleteEvent to the handlePostDelete method on the instance of the Employee object associated with that PostDeleteEvent.

The Descriptor Event ID column in the Descriptor Events table lists the DescriptorEventManager field name used to identify a particular event. The DescriptorEvent method getEventCode returns this value. For example:


if (descriptorEvent.getEventCode() == DescriptorEventManager.PreUpdateEvent) {
    // descriptorEvent represents a pre-update event
}


Descriptor Events

Category Descriptor Event ID Description

Delete

PreDeleteEvent

Occurs before an object is deleted from the data source.


AboutToDeleteEvent

Occurs when an object is deleted from the data source.


PostDeleteEvent

Occurs after an object is deleted from the data source.

Insert

PreInsertEvent

Occurs before an object is inserted in the data source.


AboutToInsertEvent

Occurs when an object is inserted in the data source.


PostInsertEvent

Occurs after an object is inserted into the data source.

Post-X

PostBuildEvent

Occurs after an object is built from the data source.


PostCloneEvent

Occurs after an object has been cloned into a unit of work.


PostMergeEvent

Occurs after an object has been merged from a unit of work.


PostRefreshEvent

Occurs after an object is refreshed from the data source.

Update

PreUpdateEvent

Occurs before an object is updated in the data source. This may be called in a unit of work even if the object has no changes and does not require updating.


AboutToUpdateEvent

Occurs when an object is updated in the data source. This method is called only if the object has changes in the unit of work.


PostUpdateEvent

Occurs after an object is updated in the data source.

Write

PreWriteEvent

Occurs before an object is inserted or updated in the data source. This occurs before PreInsertEvent and PreUpdateEvent.


PostWriteEvent

Occurs after an object is inserted or updated in the data source. This occurs after PostInsertEvent and PostUpdateEvent.


Alternatively, you can configure a descriptor event listener as an event handler (see Configuring a Descriptor Event Listener as an Event Handler).


How to Configure a Domain Object Method as an Event Handler Using Workbench

To select event methods, use this procedure:

  1. Select a descriptor in the Navigator. Its properties appear in the Editor.If the Events advanced property is not visible for the descriptor, then right-click the descriptor and choose Select Advanced Properties > Events from context menu or from the Selected menu.
  2. Click the Event tab in the Editor.
    Events Tab
    Description of follows
  3. Select the appropriate method category from the list on the left.
  4. Choose the appropriate domain object method for each method in that category.

Use this table to enter data in the following fields to select the appropriate domain object method:


Category Option Description
Deleting Methods Pre Select the domain object method that is invoked on an instance of its reference class before the instance is deleted from the data source.

Post Select the domain object method that is invoked on an instance of its reference class after the instance is deleted from the data source.
Inserting Methods Pre Select the domain object method that is invoked on an instance of its reference class before the instance is inserted in the data source.

About To Select the domain object method that is invoked on an instance of its reference class when the instance is inserted in the data source.

Post Select the domain object method that is invoked on an instance of its reference class after the instance is inserted into the data source.
Post-X Methods Build Select the domain object method that is invoked on an instance of its reference class after the instance is built from the data source.

Clone Select the domain object method that is invoked on an instance of its reference class after the instance is cloned into a unit of work.

Merge Select the domain object method that is invoked on an instance of its reference class after the instance is merged from a unit of work.

Refresh Select the domain object method that is invoked on an instance of its reference class after the instance is refreshed from the data source.
Updating Methods Pre Select the domain object method that is invoked on an instance of its reference class before the instance is updated in the data source. This may be called in a unit of work even if the object has no changes and does not require updating.

About to Select the domain object method that is invoked on an instance of its reference class when the instance is updated in the data source. This method is called only if the object has changes in the unit of work.

Post Select the domain object method that is invoked on an instance of its reference class after the instance is updated in the data source.
Writing Methods Pre

Select the domain object method that is invoked on an instance of its reference class before the instance is inserted or updated in the data source. Note: This occurs before Pre-Insert and Pre-Update event methods are invoked.


Post

Select the domain object method that is invoked on an instance of its reference class after the instance is inserted or updated in the data source. Note: This occurs after Post-Insert or Post-Update event methods are invoked.


How to Configure a Domain Object Method as an Event Handler Using Java

The Domain Object Method as a Descriptor Event Handler example shows a domain object class with method handlePostDelete defined to handle PostDeleteEvent descriptor events. The Registering a Domain Object Method as a Descriptor Event Handler example shows how to register this method as the PostDeleteEvent event handler. Whenever the EclipseLink runtime performs a post-delete operation on an instance of Employee, the runtime will dispatch a PostDeleteEvent to the DescriptorEventManager owned by the Employee object's descriptor. The DescriptorEventManager will then invoke the handlePostDelete method on the instance of Employee associated with that PostDeleteEvent.


Domain Object Method as a Descriptor Event Handler

public class Employee {
    // domain object methods
    ...
    public void handlePostDelete(DescriptorEvent event) {
        // handler implementation
    }
}


Registering a Domain Object Method as a Descriptor Event Handler

employeeDescriptor.getEventManager().setPostDeleteSelector("handlePostDelete");

Configuring a Descriptor Event Listener as an Event Handler

You can create your own DescriptorEventListner and register it with a DescriptorEventManager in a descriptor amendment method. You can also configure a DescriptorEventListner to be notified of events through the Java event model.

You can register any object that implements the DescriptorEventListener interface with the DescriptorEventManager owned by a domain object's descriptor to handle any descriptor event type (see the Descriptor Events table). To quickly implement this interface, you can extend abstract class DescriptorEventAdapter and override only the methods for the events you are interested in.

This table summarizes which descriptors support descriptor event listener configuration.


Descriptor Support for Descriptor Event Listener Configuration

Descriptor Using the Workbench
Using Java

Relational Descriptors

Supported

Supported

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported

EIS Descriptors

Supported

Supported

XML Descriptors

Unsupported

Unsupported


For example, you create a DescriptorEventListener to handle PostBuildEvent descriptor events for Employee objects. After you register this DescriptorEventListener with the DescriptorEventManager owned by the Employee object's descriptor, whenever the EclipseLink runtime performs a post-build operation on an instance of Employee, the runtime dispatches a PostBuilEvent to the event listener's postBuild method.

The Descriptor Events table lists the DescriptorEventListener methods associated with each descriptor event. The Descriptor Event Listener Method column lists the DescriptorEventListener methods associated with each DescriptorEvent.


Descriptor Events

Category Descriptor Event Listener Method Description

Delete

preDelete

Occurs before an object is deleted from the data source.


aboutToDelete

Occurs when an object is deleted from the data source.


postDelete

Occurs after an object is deleted from the data source.

Insert

preInsert

Occurs before an object is inserted in the data source.


aboutToInsert

Occurs when an object is inserted in the data source.


postInsert

Occurs after an object is inserted into the data source.

Post-X

postBuild

Occurs after an object is built from the data source.


postClone

Occurs after an object has been cloned into a unit of work.


postMerge

Occurs after an object has been merged from a unit of work.


postRefresh

Occurs after an object is refreshed from the data source.

Update

preUpdate

Occurs before an object is updated in the data source. This may be called in a unit of work even if the object has no changes and does not require updating.


aboutToUpdate

Occurs when an object is updated in the data source. This method is called only if the object has changes in the unit of work.


postUpdate

Occurs after an object is updated in the data source.

Write

preWrite

Occurs before an object is inserted or updated in the data source. This occurs before PreInsertEvent and PreUpdateEvent.


postWrite

Occurs after an object is inserted or updated in the data source. This occurs after PostInsertEvent and PostUpdateEvent.


Alternatively, you can configure a domain object method as an event handler (see Configuring a Domain Object Method as an Event Handler).


How to Configure a Descriptor Event Listener as an Event Handler Using Workbench

For more information, see Using the Workbench.


How to Configure a Descriptor Event Listener as an Event Handler Using Java

The DescriptorEventListener example shows a DescriptorEventListener that handles PostBuildEvent descriptor events. The Registering a DescriptorEventListener with the DescriptorEventManager example shows how to register this DescriptorEventListener with the Employee object's descriptor. Whenever the EclipseLink runtime performs a post-build operation on an instance of Employee, the runtime will dispatch a post build event to the corresponding DescriptorEventListener method on each registered event listener (in this case, it calls the postBuild method).


DescriptorEventListener

public class MyDescriptorEventListener extends DescriptorEventAdapter {

    public void postBuild(DescriptorEvent event) {
        // handler implementation
    }
}


Registering a DescriptorEventListener with the DescriptorEventManager

descriptor.getEventManager().addListener(new MyDescriptorEventListener());

Configuring Locking Policy

You can configure a descriptor with a locking policy that prevents one user writing over another user's work.

This table summarizes which descriptors support locking policies.


Descriptor Support for Locking Policy

Descriptor Optimistic Version Locking Policies
Optimistic Field Locking Policies
Pessimistic Locking Policy
Using the Workbench
Using Java

Relational Descriptors 1

Supported.

Supported.

Supported.

Supported.

Supported.

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Supported.

Supported.

Supported.

Unsupported.

Supported.

EIS Descriptors 2

Supported.

Unsupported.

Supported.

Supported.

Supported.

XML Descriptors

Unsupported.

Unsupported.

Unsupported.

Unsupported.

Unsupported.


1 Relational Class Descriptors only.
2 EIS Root Descriptors only.

We recommend that you use a locking policy. You should use a locking policy in any multiuser environment to prevent one user writing over another user's changes. Although locking can be particularly important if multiple servers or multiple applications access the same data, even in a single server application, the same locking issue still exists. In a multiple-server environment, locking is still relevant even if your application uses cache refreshing or cache coordination.

If you are building a three-tier application, in order to correctly lock an object, you must obtain the lock before the object is sent to client to be edited. The type of locking you choose has an influence on how you can achieve this (see Locking in a Three-Tier Application).


How to Configure Locking Policy UsingWorkbench

To specify a descriptor's locking policy, use this procedure:

  1. In the Navigator, select a relational or EIS root descriptor.If the Locking advanced property is not visible for the descriptor, right-click the descriptor and choose Select Advanced Properties > Locking from the context menu or from the Selected menu.
  2. Click the Locking tab.
    Locking Tab for a Descriptor
    Locking Tab for a Descriptor


    Locking Tab for an EIS Root Descriptor
    Locking Tab for an EIS Root Descriptor

  3. Enter data in each field on the Locking tab.

Use this table to enter data in the following fields on the tab of the appropriate type:

Field Description
Optimistic Locking Specify that the descriptor uses optimistic locking.
By Version Specify to use optimistic locking, based on versioning.
Database Field

Select the database field that contains the version value used for optimistic locking. This field appears for relational descriptors only.

XPath

Click Browse to define the path to the element or attribute that stores the version value. This field appears for EIS root descriptors only.Ensure that the attribute's type corresponds to the type of locking policy you choose (numeric for Version Locking and timestamp for Timestamp Locking).

Version Locking Specify that the descriptor uses numeric version locking. The version field (defined by the Database Field, for relational descriptors, or the XPath, for EIS root descriptors) must be a numeric type
Timestamp Locking Specify that the descriptor uses time stamp version locking, based on time stamp. The version field (defined by the Database Field, for relational descriptors, or the XPath, for EIS root descriptors) must be a timestamp type.
Store Version in Cache

Specify whether or not you want to store the version information in the cache. If you choose not to define a mapping for the version field, then you must enable this option to configure the descriptor to store the version value in the EclipseLink cache.

If you choose to define a mapping for the version field, then you must disable this option in order to store the version value in the object.
For more information, see Optimistic Locking in a Three-Tier Application.

By Fields 1

Specify to use optimistic locking, based on database fields. These fields appear for relational descriptors only.

All Fields Select all fields for optimistic locking.
Changed Fields Select only the changed fields for optimistic locking.
Selected Fields Click Add to select specific database fields for optimistic locking.
Pessimistic Locking

Ignore this option as it is EJB CMP-specific.

Wait for Lock

Ignore this option as it is EJB CMP-specific.


1 You cannot use field locking with the AttributeChangeTrackingPolicy (see Attribute Change Tracking Policy).

How to Configure Locking Policy Using Java

This section describes the following:


Configuring an Optimistic Locking Policy

Use the ClassDescriptor method setOptimisticLockingPolicy to set an instance of the appropriate optimistic field locking policy:

  • AllFieldsLockingPolicy
  • ChangedFieldsLockingPolicy
  • SelectedFieldsLockingPolicy
  • VersionLockingPolicy
  • TimestampLockingPolicy

Use the ClassDescriptor method getOptimisticLockingPolicy to get the selected locking policy type and configure it.


Configuring Optimistic Locking Policy Cascading

If you are using a VersionLockingPolicy, you can enable cascading to configure EclipseLink to automatically force a version field update on a parent object when its privately owned child object's version field changes. Use VersionLockingPolicy method setIsCascaded passing in a boolean of true to enable cascading, or false to disable cascading.

For more information, see Optimistic Version Locking Policies and Cascading.

Configuring Returning Policy

Using a ReturningPolicy, you can obtain field values from the data source when inserting or updating an object. EclipseLink uses the values that the data source returns to update the object attributes that map to these fields. You can specify which fields to return for inserts and updates. For insert fields, you can also specify whether or not to include the field value in the insert operation.

A ReturningPolicy is useful when the data source provides default or initial field values through defaults, triggers, or stored procedures. You can also use a ReturningPolicy to allow the data source to assign a sequence or primary key value.

Any object attribute that you do not configure in a descriptor's ReturningPolicy receives the default behavior: in the context of a unit of work, if the attribute has changed, its value is written to the database. If the SQL statement invokes a trigger or stored procedure that modifies the database field, the database generated value is not reflected by the object.

Use caution when deciding on whether or not to use a ReturningPolicy, as doing so may effect insert or update performance and is not compatible with batch writing (see How to Use Batch Writing for Optimization).

By default, you can use a ReturningPolicy with an Oracle Database, in which case, EclipseLink uses the Oracle RETURNING clause (see Using Workbench).

You can use a ReturningPolicy with a non-Oracle database if you configure your descriptor's insert or update query to use a stored procedure that returns the desired returned values as output parameters (see Using Java).

This table summarizes which descriptors support returning policy configuration.


Descriptor Support for Fetch Group Configuration

Descriptor Using Workbench
Using Java

Relational Descriptors

Supported.

Supported.

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported.

EIS Descriptors 1

Supported.

Supported.

XML Descriptors

Unsupported

Unsupported


1 EIS Root Descriptors only.


How to Configure Returning Policy Using Workbench

To specify the return policy for a descriptor, use this procedure:

  1. Select a descriptor in the Navigator. Its properties appear in the Editor.If the Returning advanced property is not visible for the descriptor, right-click the descriptor and choose Select Advanced Properties > Returning from the context menu or from the Selected menu.
  2. Click the Returning tab in the Editor.
    Returning Tab
    Returning Tab

  3. Complete the insert and update policies of the Returning tab.

Use the following information to enter data in each field on the tab:

Field Description
Insert These options apply to insert operations:
Name Click Add to add a database field to this ReturningPolicy for insert operations.
Return-only

When selected, EclipseLink only returns a value for this field; it will not include the field in the insert. When not selected, EclipseLink returns a value for this field and includes the value in the insert.

Update These options apply to update operations:
Name Click Add to add a database field to this ReturningPolicy for update operations


To remove a database field from the descriptor's ReturningPolicy, select the field in the Insert or Update window and click Remove.


Note: If you are using Workbench, you cannot configure a returning policy for an attribute mapped with a transformation mapping (see Transformation Mapping).



How to Configure Returning Policy Using Java

You use a ReturningPolicy to configure how EclipseLink handles returning with the attributes of an object on a field-by-field basis. This table describes the ReturnPolicy methods you use to tell EclipseLink how to handle a particular database field. Each method takes a String or a DatabaseField type parameter as field name.


Return Policy Methods

Method Applies to SQL Statements of Type... Writes Current Value of Field to Database? Returns Database- Generated Result?

addFieldForInsert

INSERT

Yes

Yes

addFieldForInsertReturnOnly

INSERT

No

Yes

addFieldForUpdate

UPDATE

Yes

Yes


You configure a descriptor with a ReturningPolicy using ClassDescriptor method setReturningPolicy.

Configuring Instantiation Policy

The EclipseLink runtime instantiates new instances of a class according to the instantiation policy you configure on the class's descriptor.

This table summarizes which descriptors support an instantiation policy.


Descriptor Support for Instantiation Policy

Descriptor Using Workbench
Using Java

Relational Descriptors

Supported.

Supported.

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Unsupported.

Supported.

EIS Descriptors

Supported.

Supported.

XML Descriptors

Supported.

Supported.


You can specify one of the following types of instantiation policy:

  • Default: EclipseLink creates a new instance of a class by calling the class's default constructor.
  • Method: EclipseLink creates a new instance of a class by calling a public static method that you define on the class descriptor.
  • Factory: EclipseLink creates a new instance of a class by calling the appropriate methods on a separate class that you implement according to the Factory design pattern.


How to Configure Instantiation Policy Using Workbench

To set the instantiation policy for a descriptor, use this procedure:

  1. In the Navigator, select a descriptor.If the Instantiation advanced property is not visible for the descriptor, right-click the descriptor and choose Select Advanced Properties > Instantiation from the context menu or from the Selected menu.
  2. Click the Instantiation tab.
    Instantiation Tab
    Instantiation Tab

  3. Complete each field on the Instantiation tab.

Use the following information to enter data in each field on the tab:

Field Description
Use Default Constructor Specify if the default constructor of the class instantiates a new instance.
Use Method Specify a method to execute to create objects from the database.
Method
Select the name of a method to be executed to create objects from the database. The method must be a public, static method on the descriptor's class and must return a new instance of the object.
Use Factory Specify an object factory method.
Factory Class Select the class of the factory object that creates the new instances.
Factory Method Select the method to be used to obtain a factory object. Choose <nothing> to use the default constructor.
Instantiation Method Select the method to be called on the factory object to obtain a new instance that will be populated with data from the data source.


How to Configure Instantiation Policy Using Java

Use one of the following ClassDescriptor methods to set the appropriate type of instantiation policy:

  • useDefaultConstructorInstantiationPolicy
  • useMethodInstantiationPolicy
  • useFactoryInstantiationPolicy


Configuring Copy Policy

The EclipseLink unit of work feature must be able to produce an exact copy (clone) persistent objects. This table summarizes which descriptors support a copy policy.


Descriptor Using the Workbench
Using Java

Relational Descriptors

Supported.

Supported.

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Unsupported.

Supported.

EIS Descriptors

Supported.

Supported.

XML Descriptors

Supported.

Supported.


EclipseLink supports the following two ways of copying objects:

  • Instantiation policy: By default, EclipseLink creates a new copy of an object by using the currently configured instantiation policy (see Configuring Instantiation Policy).
  • Method: EclipseLink creates a new copy of an object by calling a method on the object that you specify. For example, you can specify the object's clone method (or any other appropriate method on the object). Note that the clone method should return a shallow clone of the object.


How to Configure Copy Policy Using Workbench

To specify the copy policy for a descriptor, use this procedure:

  1. Select a descriptor in the Navigator. Its properties appear in the Editor.If the Copying advanced property is not visible for the descriptor, right-click the descriptor and choose Select Advanced Properties > Copying from the context menu or from the Selected menu.
  2. Click the Copying tab in the Editor.
    Copying Tab
    Copying Tab

  3. Complete each field on the Copying tab.

Use the following information to enter data in each field on the tab:

Field Description
Use Instantiation Policy

Creates a new instance of the object using the descriptor's instantiation policy (see Configuring Instantiation Policy).

Use Clone Method Specifies whether or not to call the clone method of the object. Select a method from the list.


How to Configure Copy Policy Using Java

Use one of the following ClassDescriptor methods to set the appropriate type of copy policy:

  • useCloneCopyPolicy(): the object must provide a clone method
  • useCloneCopyPolicy(java.lang.String cloneMethodName)
  • useInstantiationCopyPolicy()


Configuring Change Policy

Use a change policy to specify how EclipseLink should track changes made to objects after you register them with a unit of work. This table summarizes which descriptors support a change policy.


Descriptor Deferred Change Detection Policy
Object-Level Change Tracking Policy
Attribute Change Tracking Policy
Using the Workbench Using Java

Relational Descriptors 1

Supported.

Supported.

Supported.

Unsupported

Supported.

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Supported.

Supported.

Supported.

Unsupported

Supported.

EIS Descriptors 2

Supported.

Supported.

Supported.

Unsupported

Supported.

XML Descriptors

Unsupported

Unsupported

Unsupported

Unsupported

Unsupported


1 Relational Class Descriptors only.
2 EIS Root Descriptors only.

By default, EclipseLink uses the deferred change detection policy.

For JPA entities or POJO classes that you configure for weaving, EclipseLink weaves value holder indirection for one-to-one mappings. If you want EclipseLink to weave change tracking and your application includes collection mappings (one-to-many or many-to-many), then you must configure all collection mappings to use transparent indirect container indirection only (you may not configure your collection mappings to use eager loading nor value holder indirection).

Mutable basic mappings affect the overhead of change tracking. EclipseLink can only weave an attribute change tracking policy for immutable mappings.

EclipseLink logs a warning message at the CONFIG log level if you try to weave a descriptor that does not support change policy.

EclipseLink supports alternative change policies (policies other than DeferredChangeDetectionPolicy) for attributes that use a subset of the mappings that EclipseLink supports.

For JPA applications deployed to OC4J EclipseLink automatically uses the attribute change tracking policy.

For more information, see the following:


How to Configure Change Policy Using Java

This section describes how to configure a descriptor with a change policy using Java, and how to implement persistent classes for those change policies that are intrusive. It includes information on configuring the following:


Configuring Deferred Change Detection Policy

The DeferredChangeDetectionPolicy provides good unit of work commit performance for a wide range of object change characteristics. It is the default change policy. For more information, see Deferred Change Detection Policy).

Because it is the default, you do not need to explicitly configure this policy.

To configure EclipseLink to use a DeferredChangeDetectionPolicy, create a descriptor amendment method (see Configuring Amendment Methods) that sets the change policy, as the Setting the ObjectChangeTrackingPolicy example illustrates.


Configuring Object Change Tracking Policy

The ObjectChangeTrackingPolicy provides improved unit of work commit performance for objects with few attributes, or with many attributes and many changed attributes. For more information, see Object-Level Change Tracking Policy.

For JPA applications deployed to an application server, for which EclipseLink provides integration (see Introduction to the Application Server Support), when you configure an entity’s descriptor with an ObjectLevelChangeTrackingPolicy, EclipseLink automatically generates code of a concrete subclass to implement the EclipseLink ChangeTracker interface at deploy time. Configuring the ObjectLevelChangeTrackingPolicy prevents EclipseLink from automatically applying an AttributeChangeTrackingPolicy (see Configuring Attribute Change Tracking Policy).

To configure EclipseLink to use an ObjectChangeTrackingPolicy, use this procedure:

  1. Create a descriptor amendment method (see Configuring Amendment Methods) that sets the change policy, as this example illustrates:
    Setting the ObjectChangeTrackingPolicy
    descriptor.setObjectChangePolicy(new ObjectChangeTrackingPolicy());
    
  2. For plain Java objects, code each of your persistent classes to implement the ChangeTracker interface, as this example illustrates:
    Implementing the ChangeTracker Interface for the ObjectChangeTrackingPolicy
    public class Employee implements ChangeTracker {
    
        PropertyChangeListener listener;
        String firstName;
    
        public PropertyChangeListener getEclipseLinkPropertyChangeListener() {
          return this.listener;
        }
    
        public void setEclipseLinkPropertyChangeListener(PropertyChangeListener listener) {
          this.listener = listener;
        }
        ...
        public void setFirstName(String firstName) {
          propertyChange("firstName", getFirstName(), firstName);
          this.firstName = firstName;
        }
        ...
        public void propertyChange(String propertyName, Object oldValue, Object newValue) {
            if (listener != null) {
                if (oldValue != newValue) {
                    listener.propertyChange(
                        new PropertyChangeEvent(this, propertyName, oldValue, newValue));
                }
            }
        }
    }
    


Configuring Attribute Change Tracking Policy

The AttributeChangeTrackingPolicy provides improved unit of work commit performance for objects with many attributes and few changed attributes. In general, this is the most efficient change policy. It is the default change policy for JPA applications. For more information, see Attribute Change Tracking Policy).


Note: You cannot use the AttributeChangeTrackingPolicy if you are using any instance of FieldsLockingPolicy (see Optimistic Field Locking Policies).


When you deploy an EclipseLink-enabled JPA application, EclipseLink automatically configures your persistent classes to use the AttributeChangeTrackingPolicy and, using bytecode weaving, configures your persistence classes to implement the EclipseLink ChangeTracker interface. In this case, you do not need to explicitly configure this change policy.

To configure EclipseLink to use an AttributeChangeTrackingPolicy for plain Java objects or other application servers, use this procedure:

  1. Create a descriptor amendment method (see Configuring Amendment Methods) that sets the change policy, as this example illustrates:
    Setting the DeferredChangeDetectionPolicy
    descriptor.setObjectChangePolicy(new AttributeChangeTrackingPolicy());
    
  2. Code each of your persistent classes to implement the ChangeTracker interface, as this example illustrates:
    Implementing the ChangeTracker Interface for the AttributeChangeTrackingPolicy
    public class Employee implements ChangeTracker {
    
       PropertyChangeListener listener;
       String firstName;
    
       public PropertyChangeListener getEclipseLink PropertyChangeListener() {
         return this.listener;
       }
    
       public void setEclipseLinkPropertyChangeListener(PropertyChangeListener listener) {
         this.listener = listener;
       }
       ...
       public void setFirstName(String firstName) {
         propertyChange("firstName", getFirstName(), firstName);
         this.firstName = firstName;
       }
       ...
       public void propertyChange(String propertyName, Object oldValue, Object newValue) {
           if (listener != null) {
               if (oldValue != newValue) {
                   listener.propertyChange(
                       new PropertyChangeEvent(this, propertyName, oldValue, newValue));
               }
           }
       }
    }
    


Configuring a History Policy

If you want to use historical sessions (see Historical Sessions) to execute historical queries (see Historical Queries) against a historical schema of your own design, configure your descriptors with an EclipseLink HistoryPolicy that describes your historical schema.

If you are using an Oracle Database platform for Oracle9i Database Server (or later), you can query the historical versions of objects automatically maintained by the Oracle Database without the need for a history policy. For more information, see How to Configure Historical Sessions Using an Oracle Platform.

This table summarizes which descriptors support history policy configuration.


Descriptor How to Use Workbench Using Java

Relational Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported.

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported.

EIS Descriptors

Unsupported

Unsupported

XML Descriptors

Unsupported

Unsupported


There are many ways to configure a historical database schema. EclipseLink supports several historical schema configurations that you can describe with a HistoryPolicy (see Historical Session Limitations).


Example Historical Schema

As shown in the Example Table for EMPLOYEE and Example History Table EMPLOYEE_HIST, a common approach is to define a special history table to store past versions of an object: one history table for each regular table that requires historical persistence. The history table typically has the same fields as the corresponding regular table plus fields (such as row start and end) used to define an interval that represents the life time of a particular version.

Note: EclipseLink assumes that the current version of an object corresponds to the historical table row whose row end field is NULL.


EclipseLink will include the history tables described by a HistoryPolicy when you execute a historical query.

This table shows the schema for an EMPLOYEE table. The table currently contains one EMPLOYEE instance.


Example Table for EMPLOYEE

EMP_ID F_NAME L_NAME SALARY

1

Jane

Doe

55000


This table shows one possible history table EMPLOYEE_HIST that stores historical versions of employees. The table contains the current EMPLOYEE (the version with a ROW_END value of NULL) and one historical version.


Example History Table EMPLOYEE_HIST

EMP_ID F_NAME L_NAME SALARY ROW_START ROW_END

1

Jane

Doe

50000

29/08/2004

31/08/2004

1

Jane

Doe

55000

31/08/2004

NULL


Because every record has a start and end interval, the history table can store multiple versions of the same object (with the same primary key). The unique identifier of a particular version is given by the existing primary key, plus the value of the start field. For example, in Example History Table EMPLOYEE_HIST, the unique identifier of the current version is given by (EMP_ID, START) = (1, 31/08/2004).


How to Configure a History Policy Using Java

This example shows how to describe the schema shown in Example Table for EMPLOYEE and Example History Table EMPLOYEE_HIST using the EclipseLink HistoryPolicy:


HistoryPolicy for One Table

HistoryPolicy policy = new HistoryPolicy();
policy.addStartFieldName("ROW_START");
policy.addEndFieldName("ROW_END");
policy.addHistoryTableName("EMPLOYEE", "EMPLOYEE_HIST");

// Assuming database triggers or stored procedures update history tables
policy.setShouldHandleWrites(false);

employeeDescriptor.setHistoryPolicy(policy);


You can specify more than one table with a HistoryPolicy as shown in this examle. In this example, all history tables have a start field named ROW_START but the EMPLOYEE_HIST and SALARY_HIST tables have different end fields. To avoid ambiguity, the end field names are prefixed with their respective history table names.


HistoryPolicy for Multiple Tables

HistoryPolicy policy = new HistoryPolicy();
policy.addStartFieldName("ROW_START");
policy.addEndFieldName("EMPLOYEE_HIST.ROW_END");
policy.addEndFieldName("SALARY_HIST.VALID_UNTIL");
policy.addHistoryTableName("EMPLOYEE", "EMPLOYEE_HIST");
policy.addHistoryTableName("SALARY", "SALARY_HIST");
// Assuming database triggers or stored procedures update history tables
policy.setShouldHandleWrites(false);

employeeDescriptor.setHistoryPolicy(policy);


Configuring Write Responsibility

Use HistoryPolicy method setShouldHandleWrites to specify whether or not EclipseLink is responsible for writing data to history tables. By default, setShouldHandleWrites is set to true.

Either the database or EclipseLink can be responsible for writing data to the history tables.

You can configure the database to write data to history tables by way of triggers or stored procedures that customize create, insert, and delete operations to modify both the regular table and the history table appropriately.


Configuring Wrapper Policy

EclipseLink lets you use wrappers (or proxies) in cases where the persistent class is not the same class that is to be presented to users.

For example, in the EJB specification prior to 3.0, the entity bean class (the class that implements javax.ejb.EntityBean) is persistent, but is hidden from users who interact with a class that implements javax.ejb.EJBObject (local or remote interface class). In this example, the EJBObject acts as a proxy (or wrapper) for the EntityBean.

In cases where such a wrapper is used, EclipseLink continues to make the class specified in the descriptor persistent, but returns the appropriate instance of the wrapper whenever a persistent object is requested.

This table summarizes which descriptors support a wrapper policy.


Descriptor Support for Wrapper Policy

Descriptor How to Use Workbench Using Java

Relational Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported.

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported.

EIS Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported.

XML Descriptors

Unsupported

Unsupported


Use a wrapper policy to tell EclipseLink how to create wrappers for a particular persistent class, and how to obtain the underlying persistent object from a given wrapper instance.

If you specify a wrapper policy, EclipseLink uses the policy to wrap and unwrap persistent objects as required:

  • Wrapper policies implement the interface org.eclipse.persistence.descriptors.WrapperPolicy.
  • A wrapper policy is specified by setting the wrapper policy for the EclipseLink descriptor.
  • By default, no wrapper policy is used (the wrapper policy for a descriptor is null by default).


Note: Wrapper policies are advanced EclipseLink options. Using a wrapper policy may not be compatible with some Workbench features.


Wrapper policies cannot be set using the Workbench and can be set only using Java code (see Using Java).


How to Configure Wrapper Policy Using Java

Use the ClassDescriptor method setWrapperPolicy to set the appropriate instance of WrapperPolicy.


Configuring Fetch Groups

By default, when you execute an object-level read query for a particular object class, EclipseLink returns all the persistent attributes mapped in the object's descriptor. With this single query, all the object's persistent attributes are defined, and calling their get methods returns the value directly from the object.

When you are interested in only some of the attributes of an object, it may be more efficient to return only a subset of the object's attributes using a fetch group.

Using a fetch group, you can define a subset of an object's attributes and associate the fetch group with either a ReadObjectQuery or ReadAllQuery query. When you execute the query, EclipseLink retrieves only the attributes in the fetch group. EclipseLink automatically executes a query to fetch all the attributes excluded from this subset when and if you call a get method on any one of the excluded attributes.

You can define more than one fetch group for a class. You can optionally designate at most one such fetch group as the default fetch group. If you execute either a ReadObjectQuery or ReadAllQuery query without specifying a fetch group, EclipseLink will use the default fetch group, unless you configure the query otherwise (see How to Configure Default Fetch Group Behavior).

You can use fetch groups in JPA projects for EJB objects, as well as for POJO classes. For POJO classes, use partial object querying (see Partial Object Queries).

Before using fetch groups, we recommend that you perform a careful analysis of system use. In many cases, the extra queries required to load attributes not in the fetch group could well offset the gain from the partial attribute loading. For more information about optimizing read performance, see Read Optimization Examples.

This table summarizes which descriptors support fetch group configuration.

Descriptor Using Workbench Using Java

Relational Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported.

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported.

EIS Descriptors

Unsupported

Unsupported

XML Descriptors

Unsupported

Unsupported


For JPA entities or POJO classes that you configure for weaving, EclipseLink uses fetch groups to improve performance.

This section describes how to create a fetch group, store it in a descriptor, and optionally designate a fetch group as the default fetch group for its descriptor reference class.

For more information, see the following:


How to Configure Fetch Groups Using Java

To configure a fetch group, Use a descriptor amendment method as this example shows.


Configuring a Fetch Group

//Create a FetchGroupManager for the descriptor

descriptor.setFetchGroupManager(new FetchGroupManager());
// Create a FetchGroup
FetchGroup group = new FetchGroup("nameOnly");
// Add attributes to FetchGroup. Alternatively, use
// FetchGroup method addAttributes, passing in a Set of String attribute names
group.addAttribute("firstName");
group.addAttribute("lastName");
// Add the FetchGroup to the FetchGroupManager
descriptor.getFetchGroupManager().addFetchGroup(group);
//Set the default fetch group
descriptor.getFetchGroupManager().setDefaultFetchGroup(group);


Each instance of FetchGroup that you store in a descriptor must be configured with a fetch group name that is unique for that descriptor (that is, each descriptor owns a set of named fetch groups).

When configuring fetch groups, note that the primary key fields and other required fields (such as inheritance type and optimistic lock version) are always included in all fetch groups.Fetch groups can include direct and relationship attributes. Including a relationship attribute in a fetch group does not cause the relationship to be joined or instantiated: joining and indirection are set independently of fetch groups.

After you add a fetch group to a descriptor, you can configure a ReadObjectQuery or ReadAllQuery query with this fetch group by name (nameOnly) or rely on EclipseLink to use this fetch group by default. For more information, see Using Queries with Fetch Groups.

Configuring a Descriptor Customizer Class

A descriptor customizer class is a Java class that implements the org.eclipse.persistence.internal.sessions.factories.DescriptorCustomizer interface and provides a default (zero-argument) constructor. You can use a descriptor customizer to customize a descriptor at run time on a loaded session before login occurs, similar to how you can use an amendment method (see Configuring Amendment Methods).

This table summarizes which sessions support customizer class configuration.


Descriptor How to Configure Customizer Class Using Workbench Using Java

Relational Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported.

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported.

EIS Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported.

XML Descriptors

Unsupported

Supported.

For more information, see Descriptor Customization.


How to Configure Customizer Class Using Java

When using Java, create a customize class that implements the org.eclipse.persistence.internal.sessions.factories.DescriptorCustomizer interface. This example illustrates the creation of a descriptor customizer.


Creating a SessionCustomizer Class


import org.eclipse.persistence.internal.sessions.factories.DescriptorCustomizer;
import org.eclipse.persistence.descriptors.ClassDescriptor;

public class EmployeeDescriptorCustomizer implements DescriptorCustomizer {

    public void customize(ClassDescriptor descriptor) {
        descriptor.setReadOnly();
    }
}


Configuring Amendment Methods

Some EclipseLink descriptor features cannot be configured from the Workbench. To use these features, you must write a Java method to amend the descriptor after it is loaded as part of the project. This method must have the following characteristics:

  • Be public static.
  • Take a single parameter of type org.persistence.descriptors.structures.ClassDescriptor.

In the implementation of this method, you can configure advanced features of the descriptor using any of the public descriptor and mapping API.

This table summarizes which descriptors support amendment methods.

Descriptor Using the Workbench
How to Use Java

Relational Descriptors

Supported.

Unsupported

Object-Relational Data Type Descriptors

Unsupported

Unsupported

EIS Descriptors

Supported.

Unsupported

XML Descriptors

Supported.

Unsupported


This section describes how to associate an amendment method with a descriptor.

For more information about how to implement an amendment method, see Amendment and After-Load Methods.

Alternatively, you can use a descriptor customizer class (see Configuring a Descriptor Customizer Class.

To customize a session, use a session customizer class (see Configuring a Session Customizer Class|Configuring a Session Customizer Class).


How to Configure Amendment Methods Using Workbench

To use an amendment method with a descriptor (after it is loaded as part of the project) use this procedure:

  1. Select a descriptor in the Navigator. Its properties appear in the Editor.If the After load advanced property is not visible for the descriptor, right-click the descriptor and choose Select Advanced Properties > After Load from context menu or from the Selected menu.
  2. Click the After Load tab in the Editor.
    After Load Tab
    After Load Tab

  3. Complete each field on the After Load tab.


Field Description
Class Click Browse and choose the class of the method to execute.
Static Method Use the Static Method list to choose the static method to execute at run time, after loading the descriptor. The method must be public static and take a single attribute of type org.eclipse.persistence.descriptors.ClassDescriptor.




Copyright Statement

Back to the top